]> git.ipfire.org Git - thirdparty/gcc.git/blob - gcc/doc/tm.texi.in
* Add TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV target macro.
[thirdparty/gcc.git] / gcc / doc / tm.texi.in
1 @c Copyright (C) 1988-2014 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
2 @c This is part of the GCC manual.
3 @c For copying conditions, see the file gcc.texi.
4
5 @node Target Macros
6 @chapter Target Description Macros and Functions
7 @cindex machine description macros
8 @cindex target description macros
9 @cindex macros, target description
10 @cindex @file{tm.h} macros
11
12 In addition to the file @file{@var{machine}.md}, a machine description
13 includes a C header file conventionally given the name
14 @file{@var{machine}.h} and a C source file named @file{@var{machine}.c}.
15 The header file defines numerous macros that convey the information
16 about the target machine that does not fit into the scheme of the
17 @file{.md} file. The file @file{tm.h} should be a link to
18 @file{@var{machine}.h}. The header file @file{config.h} includes
19 @file{tm.h} and most compiler source files include @file{config.h}. The
20 source file defines a variable @code{targetm}, which is a structure
21 containing pointers to functions and data relating to the target
22 machine. @file{@var{machine}.c} should also contain their definitions,
23 if they are not defined elsewhere in GCC, and other functions called
24 through the macros defined in the @file{.h} file.
25
26 @menu
27 * Target Structure:: The @code{targetm} variable.
28 * Driver:: Controlling how the driver runs the compilation passes.
29 * Run-time Target:: Defining @samp{-m} options like @option{-m68000} and @option{-m68020}.
30 * Per-Function Data:: Defining data structures for per-function information.
31 * Storage Layout:: Defining sizes and alignments of data.
32 * Type Layout:: Defining sizes and properties of basic user data types.
33 * Registers:: Naming and describing the hardware registers.
34 * Register Classes:: Defining the classes of hardware registers.
35 * Stack and Calling:: Defining which way the stack grows and by how much.
36 * Varargs:: Defining the varargs macros.
37 * Trampolines:: Code set up at run time to enter a nested function.
38 * Library Calls:: Controlling how library routines are implicitly called.
39 * Addressing Modes:: Defining addressing modes valid for memory operands.
40 * Anchored Addresses:: Defining how @option{-fsection-anchors} should work.
41 * Condition Code:: Defining how insns update the condition code.
42 * Costs:: Defining relative costs of different operations.
43 * Scheduling:: Adjusting the behavior of the instruction scheduler.
44 * Sections:: Dividing storage into text, data, and other sections.
45 * PIC:: Macros for position independent code.
46 * Assembler Format:: Defining how to write insns and pseudo-ops to output.
47 * Debugging Info:: Defining the format of debugging output.
48 * Floating Point:: Handling floating point for cross-compilers.
49 * Mode Switching:: Insertion of mode-switching instructions.
50 * Target Attributes:: Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}.
51 * Emulated TLS:: Emulated TLS support.
52 * MIPS Coprocessors:: MIPS coprocessor support and how to customize it.
53 * PCH Target:: Validity checking for precompiled headers.
54 * C++ ABI:: Controlling C++ ABI changes.
55 * Named Address Spaces:: Adding support for named address spaces
56 * Misc:: Everything else.
57 @end menu
58
59 @node Target Structure
60 @section The Global @code{targetm} Variable
61 @cindex target hooks
62 @cindex target functions
63
64 @deftypevar {struct gcc_target} targetm
65 The target @file{.c} file must define the global @code{targetm} variable
66 which contains pointers to functions and data relating to the target
67 machine. The variable is declared in @file{target.h};
68 @file{target-def.h} defines the macro @code{TARGET_INITIALIZER} which is
69 used to initialize the variable, and macros for the default initializers
70 for elements of the structure. The @file{.c} file should override those
71 macros for which the default definition is inappropriate. For example:
72 @smallexample
73 #include "target.h"
74 #include "target-def.h"
75
76 /* @r{Initialize the GCC target structure.} */
77
78 #undef TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
79 #define TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES @var{machine}_comp_type_attributes
80
81 struct gcc_target targetm = TARGET_INITIALIZER;
82 @end smallexample
83 @end deftypevar
84
85 Where a macro should be defined in the @file{.c} file in this manner to
86 form part of the @code{targetm} structure, it is documented below as a
87 ``Target Hook'' with a prototype. Many macros will change in future
88 from being defined in the @file{.h} file to being part of the
89 @code{targetm} structure.
90
91 Similarly, there is a @code{targetcm} variable for hooks that are
92 specific to front ends for C-family languages, documented as ``C
93 Target Hook''. This is declared in @file{c-family/c-target.h}, the
94 initializer @code{TARGETCM_INITIALIZER} in
95 @file{c-family/c-target-def.h}. If targets initialize @code{targetcm}
96 themselves, they should set @code{target_has_targetcm=yes} in
97 @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a default definition is used.
98
99 Similarly, there is a @code{targetm_common} variable for hooks that
100 are shared between the compiler driver and the compilers proper,
101 documented as ``Common Target Hook''. This is declared in
102 @file{common/common-target.h}, the initializer
103 @code{TARGETM_COMMON_INITIALIZER} in
104 @file{common/common-target-def.h}. If targets initialize
105 @code{targetm_common} themselves, they should set
106 @code{target_has_targetm_common=yes} in @file{config.gcc}; otherwise a
107 default definition is used.
108
109 @node Driver
110 @section Controlling the Compilation Driver, @file{gcc}
111 @cindex driver
112 @cindex controlling the compilation driver
113
114 @c prevent bad page break with this line
115 You can control the compilation driver.
116
117 @defmac DRIVER_SELF_SPECS
118 A list of specs for the driver itself. It should be a suitable
119 initializer for an array of strings, with no surrounding braces.
120
121 The driver applies these specs to its own command line between loading
122 default @file{specs} files (but not command-line specified ones) and
123 choosing the multilib directory or running any subcommands. It
124 applies them in the order given, so each spec can depend on the
125 options added by earlier ones. It is also possible to remove options
126 using @samp{%<@var{option}} in the usual way.
127
128 This macro can be useful when a port has several interdependent target
129 options. It provides a way of standardizing the command line so
130 that the other specs are easier to write.
131
132 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
133 @end defmac
134
135 @defmac OPTION_DEFAULT_SPECS
136 A list of specs used to support configure-time default options (i.e.@:
137 @option{--with} options) in the driver. It should be a suitable initializer
138 for an array of structures, each containing two strings, without the
139 outermost pair of surrounding braces.
140
141 The first item in the pair is the name of the default. This must match
142 the code in @file{config.gcc} for the target. The second item is a spec
143 to apply if a default with this name was specified. The string
144 @samp{%(VALUE)} in the spec will be replaced by the value of the default
145 everywhere it occurs.
146
147 The driver will apply these specs to its own command line between loading
148 default @file{specs} files and processing @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}, using
149 the same mechanism as @code{DRIVER_SELF_SPECS}.
150
151 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
152 @end defmac
153
154 @defmac CPP_SPEC
155 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
156 pass to CPP@. It can also specify how to translate options you
157 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the CPP@.
158
159 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
160 @end defmac
161
162 @defmac CPLUSPLUS_CPP_SPEC
163 This macro is just like @code{CPP_SPEC}, but is used for C++, rather
164 than C@. If you do not define this macro, then the value of
165 @code{CPP_SPEC} (if any) will be used instead.
166 @end defmac
167
168 @defmac CC1_SPEC
169 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
170 pass to @code{cc1}, @code{cc1plus}, @code{f771}, and the other language
171 front ends.
172 It can also specify how to translate options you give to GCC into options
173 for GCC to pass to front ends.
174
175 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
176 @end defmac
177
178 @defmac CC1PLUS_SPEC
179 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
180 pass to @code{cc1plus}. It can also specify how to translate options you
181 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the @code{cc1plus}.
182
183 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
184 Note that everything defined in CC1_SPEC is already passed to
185 @code{cc1plus} so there is no need to duplicate the contents of
186 CC1_SPEC in CC1PLUS_SPEC@.
187 @end defmac
188
189 @defmac ASM_SPEC
190 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
191 pass to the assembler. It can also specify how to translate options
192 you give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the assembler.
193 See the file @file{sun3.h} for an example of this.
194
195 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
196 @end defmac
197
198 @defmac ASM_FINAL_SPEC
199 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program how to
200 run any programs which cleanup after the normal assembler.
201 Normally, this is not needed. See the file @file{mips.h} for
202 an example of this.
203
204 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
205 @end defmac
206
207 @defmac AS_NEEDS_DASH_FOR_PIPED_INPUT
208 Define this macro, with no value, if the driver should give the assembler
209 an argument consisting of a single dash, @option{-}, to instruct it to
210 read from its standard input (which will be a pipe connected to the
211 output of the compiler proper). This argument is given after any
212 @option{-o} option specifying the name of the output file.
213
214 If you do not define this macro, the assembler is assumed to read its
215 standard input if given no non-option arguments. If your assembler
216 cannot read standard input at all, use a @samp{%@{pipe:%e@}} construct;
217 see @file{mips.h} for instance.
218 @end defmac
219
220 @defmac LINK_SPEC
221 A C string constant that tells the GCC driver program options to
222 pass to the linker. It can also specify how to translate options you
223 give to GCC into options for GCC to pass to the linker.
224
225 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
226 @end defmac
227
228 @defmac LIB_SPEC
229 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The difference
230 between the two is that @code{LIB_SPEC} is used at the end of the
231 command given to the linker.
232
233 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that
234 loads the standard C library from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
235 @end defmac
236
237 @defmac LIBGCC_SPEC
238 Another C string constant that tells the GCC driver program
239 how and when to place a reference to @file{libgcc.a} into the
240 linker command line. This constant is placed both before and after
241 the value of @code{LIB_SPEC}.
242
243 If this macro is not defined, the GCC driver provides a default that
244 passes the string @option{-lgcc} to the linker.
245 @end defmac
246
247 @defmac REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC
248 By default, if @code{ENABLE_SHARED_LIBGCC} is defined, the
249 @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} is not directly used by the driver program but is
250 instead modified to refer to different versions of @file{libgcc.a}
251 depending on the values of the command line flags @option{-static},
252 @option{-shared}, @option{-static-libgcc}, and @option{-shared-libgcc}. On
253 targets where these modifications are inappropriate, define
254 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} instead. @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC} tells the
255 driver how to place a reference to @file{libgcc} on the link command
256 line, but, unlike @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}, it is used unmodified.
257 @end defmac
258
259 @defmac USE_LD_AS_NEEDED
260 A macro that controls the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC}
261 mentioned in @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}. If nonzero, a spec will be
262 generated that uses @option{--as-needed} or equivalent options and the
263 shared @file{libgcc} in place of the
264 static exception handler library, when linking without any of
265 @code{-static}, @code{-static-libgcc}, or @code{-shared-libgcc}.
266 @end defmac
267
268 @defmac LINK_EH_SPEC
269 If defined, this C string constant is added to @code{LINK_SPEC}.
270 When @code{USE_LD_AS_NEEDED} is zero or undefined, it also affects
271 the modifications to @code{LIBGCC_SPEC} mentioned in
272 @code{REAL_LIBGCC_SPEC}.
273 @end defmac
274
275 @defmac STARTFILE_SPEC
276 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
277 difference between the two is that @code{STARTFILE_SPEC} is used at
278 the very beginning of the command given to the linker.
279
280 If this macro is not defined, a default is provided that loads the
281 standard C startup file from the usual place. See @file{gcc.c}.
282 @end defmac
283
284 @defmac ENDFILE_SPEC
285 Another C string constant used much like @code{LINK_SPEC}. The
286 difference between the two is that @code{ENDFILE_SPEC} is used at
287 the very end of the command given to the linker.
288
289 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
290 @end defmac
291
292 @defmac THREAD_MODEL_SPEC
293 GCC @code{-v} will print the thread model GCC was configured to use.
294 However, this doesn't work on platforms that are multilibbed on thread
295 models, such as AIX 4.3. On such platforms, define
296 @code{THREAD_MODEL_SPEC} such that it evaluates to a string without
297 blanks that names one of the recognized thread models. @code{%*}, the
298 default value of this macro, will expand to the value of
299 @code{thread_file} set in @file{config.gcc}.
300 @end defmac
301
302 @defmac SYSROOT_SUFFIX_SPEC
303 Define this macro to add a suffix to the target sysroot when GCC is
304 configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to search for usr/lib,
305 et al, within sysroot+suffix.
306 @end defmac
307
308 @defmac SYSROOT_HEADERS_SUFFIX_SPEC
309 Define this macro to add a headers_suffix to the target sysroot when
310 GCC is configured with a sysroot. This will cause GCC to pass the
311 updated sysroot+headers_suffix to CPP, causing it to search for
312 usr/include, et al, within sysroot+headers_suffix.
313 @end defmac
314
315 @defmac EXTRA_SPECS
316 Define this macro to provide additional specifications to put in the
317 @file{specs} file that can be used in various specifications like
318 @code{CC1_SPEC}.
319
320 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures,
321 containing a string constant, that defines the specification name, and a
322 string constant that provides the specification.
323
324 Do not define this macro if it does not need to do anything.
325
326 @code{EXTRA_SPECS} is useful when an architecture contains several
327 related targets, which have various @code{@dots{}_SPECS} which are similar
328 to each other, and the maintainer would like one central place to keep
329 these definitions.
330
331 For example, the PowerPC System V.4 targets use @code{EXTRA_SPECS} to
332 define either @code{_CALL_SYSV} when the System V calling sequence is
333 used or @code{_CALL_AIX} when the older AIX-based calling sequence is
334 used.
335
336 The @file{config/rs6000/rs6000.h} target file defines:
337
338 @smallexample
339 #define EXTRA_SPECS \
340 @{ "cpp_sysv_default", CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT @},
341
342 #define CPP_SYS_DEFAULT ""
343 @end smallexample
344
345 The @file{config/rs6000/sysv.h} target file defines:
346 @smallexample
347 #undef CPP_SPEC
348 #define CPP_SPEC \
349 "%@{posix: -D_POSIX_SOURCE @} \
350 %@{mcall-sysv: -D_CALL_SYSV @} \
351 %@{!mcall-sysv: %(cpp_sysv_default) @} \
352 %@{msoft-float: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@} %@{mcpu=403: -D_SOFT_FLOAT@}"
353
354 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
355 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_SYSV"
356 @end smallexample
357
358 while the @file{config/rs6000/eabiaix.h} target file defines
359 @code{CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT} as:
360
361 @smallexample
362 #undef CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT
363 #define CPP_SYSV_DEFAULT "-D_CALL_AIX"
364 @end smallexample
365 @end defmac
366
367 @defmac LINK_LIBGCC_SPECIAL_1
368 Define this macro if the driver program should find the library
369 @file{libgcc.a}. If you do not define this macro, the driver program will pass
370 the argument @option{-lgcc} to tell the linker to do the search.
371 @end defmac
372
373 @defmac LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC
374 The sequence in which libgcc and libc are specified to the linker.
375 By default this is @code{%G %L %G}.
376 @end defmac
377
378 @defmac LINK_COMMAND_SPEC
379 A C string constant giving the complete command line need to execute the
380 linker. When you do this, you will need to update your port each time a
381 change is made to the link command line within @file{gcc.c}. Therefore,
382 define this macro only if you need to completely redefine the command
383 line for invoking the linker and there is no other way to accomplish
384 the effect you need. Overriding this macro may be avoidable by overriding
385 @code{LINK_GCC_C_SEQUENCE_SPEC} instead.
386 @end defmac
387
388 @hook TARGET_ALWAYS_STRIP_DOTDOT
389
390 @defmac MULTILIB_DEFAULTS
391 Define this macro as a C expression for the initializer of an array of
392 string to tell the driver program which options are defaults for this
393 target and thus do not need to be handled specially when using
394 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS}.
395
396 Do not define this macro if @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} is not defined in
397 the target makefile fragment or if none of the options listed in
398 @code{MULTILIB_OPTIONS} are set by default.
399 @xref{Target Fragment}.
400 @end defmac
401
402 @defmac RELATIVE_PREFIX_NOT_LINKDIR
403 Define this macro to tell @command{gcc} that it should only translate
404 a @option{-B} prefix into a @option{-L} linker option if the prefix
405 indicates an absolute file name.
406 @end defmac
407
408 @defmac MD_EXEC_PREFIX
409 If defined, this macro is an additional prefix to try after
410 @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched
411 when the compiler is built as a cross
412 compiler. If you define @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, then be sure to add it
413 to the list of directories used to find the assembler in @file{configure.in}.
414 @end defmac
415
416 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
417 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
418 standard choice of @code{libdir} as the default prefix to
419 try when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
420 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX} is not searched when the compiler
421 is built as a cross compiler.
422 @end defmac
423
424 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
425 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
426 standard choice of @code{/lib} as a prefix to try after the default prefix
427 when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
428 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1} is not searched when the compiler
429 is built as a cross compiler.
430 @end defmac
431
432 @defmac STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2
433 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
434 standard choice of @code{/lib} as yet another prefix to try after the
435 default prefix when searching for startup files such as @file{crt0.o}.
436 @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2} is not searched when the compiler
437 is built as a cross compiler.
438 @end defmac
439
440 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX
441 If defined, this macro supplies an additional prefix to try after the
442 standard prefixes. @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX} is not searched when the
443 compiler is built as a cross compiler.
444 @end defmac
445
446 @defmac MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1
447 If defined, this macro supplies yet another prefix to try after the
448 standard prefixes. It is not searched when the compiler is built as a
449 cross compiler.
450 @end defmac
451
452 @defmac INIT_ENVIRONMENT
453 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to set environment
454 variables for programs called by the driver, such as the assembler and
455 loader. The driver passes the value of this macro to @code{putenv} to
456 initialize the necessary environment variables.
457 @end defmac
458
459 @defmac LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR
460 Define this macro as a C string constant if you wish to override the
461 standard choice of @file{/usr/local/include} as the default prefix to
462 try when searching for local header files. @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR}
463 comes before @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR} (set in
464 @file{config.gcc}, normally @file{/usr/include}) in the search order.
465
466 Cross compilers do not search either @file{/usr/local/include} or its
467 replacement.
468 @end defmac
469
470 @defmac NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_COMPONENT
471 The ``component'' corresponding to @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}.
472 See @code{INCLUDE_DEFAULTS}, below, for the description of components.
473 If you do not define this macro, no component is used.
474 @end defmac
475
476 @defmac INCLUDE_DEFAULTS
477 Define this macro if you wish to override the entire default search path
478 for include files. For a native compiler, the default search path
479 usually consists of @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR}, @code{LOCAL_INCLUDE_DIR},
480 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}, and
481 @code{NATIVE_SYSTEM_HEADER_DIR}. In addition, @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR}
482 and @code{GCC_INCLUDE_DIR} are defined automatically by @file{Makefile},
483 and specify private search areas for GCC@. The directory
484 @code{GPLUSPLUS_INCLUDE_DIR} is used only for C++ programs.
485
486 The definition should be an initializer for an array of structures.
487 Each array element should have four elements: the directory name (a
488 string constant), the component name (also a string constant), a flag
489 for C++-only directories,
490 and a flag showing that the includes in the directory don't need to be
491 wrapped in @code{extern @samp{C}} when compiling C++. Mark the end of
492 the array with a null element.
493
494 The component name denotes what GNU package the include file is part of,
495 if any, in all uppercase letters. For example, it might be @samp{GCC}
496 or @samp{BINUTILS}. If the package is part of a vendor-supplied
497 operating system, code the component name as @samp{0}.
498
499 For example, here is the definition used for VAX/VMS:
500
501 @smallexample
502 #define INCLUDE_DEFAULTS \
503 @{ \
504 @{ "GNU_GXX_INCLUDE:", "G++", 1, 1@}, \
505 @{ "GNU_CC_INCLUDE:", "GCC", 0, 0@}, \
506 @{ "SYS$SYSROOT:[SYSLIB.]", 0, 0, 0@}, \
507 @{ ".", 0, 0, 0@}, \
508 @{ 0, 0, 0, 0@} \
509 @}
510 @end smallexample
511 @end defmac
512
513 Here is the order of prefixes tried for exec files:
514
515 @enumerate
516 @item
517 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
518
519 @item
520 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or, if @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX}
521 is not set and the compiler has not been installed in the configure-time
522 @var{prefix}, the location in which the compiler has actually been installed.
523
524 @item
525 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{COMPILER_PATH}.
526
527 @item
528 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if the compiler has been installed
529 in the configured-time @var{prefix}.
530
531 @item
532 The location @file{/usr/libexec/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
533
534 @item
535 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
536
537 @item
538 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
539 compiler.
540 @end enumerate
541
542 Here is the order of prefixes tried for startfiles:
543
544 @enumerate
545 @item
546 Any prefixes specified by the user with @option{-B}.
547
548 @item
549 The environment variable @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} or its automatically determined
550 value based on the installed toolchain location.
551
552 @item
553 The directories specified by the environment variable @code{LIBRARY_PATH}
554 (or port-specific name; native only, cross compilers do not use this).
555
556 @item
557 The macro @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX}, but only if the toolchain is installed
558 in the configured @var{prefix} or this is a native compiler.
559
560 @item
561 The location @file{/usr/lib/gcc/}, but only if this is a native compiler.
562
563 @item
564 The macro @code{MD_EXEC_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a native
565 compiler.
566
567 @item
568 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, if defined, but only if this is a
569 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
570
571 @item
572 The macro @code{MD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, if defined, but only if this is a
573 native compiler, or we have a target system root.
574
575 @item
576 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX}, with any sysroot modifications.
577 If this path is relative it will be prefixed by @code{GCC_EXEC_PREFIX} and
578 the machine suffix or @code{STANDARD_EXEC_PREFIX} and the machine suffix.
579
580 @item
581 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_1}, but only if this is a native
582 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
583 @file{/lib/}.
584
585 @item
586 The macro @code{STANDARD_STARTFILE_PREFIX_2}, but only if this is a native
587 compiler, or we have a target system root. The default for this macro is
588 @file{/usr/lib/}.
589 @end enumerate
590
591 @node Run-time Target
592 @section Run-time Target Specification
593 @cindex run-time target specification
594 @cindex predefined macros
595 @cindex target specifications
596
597 @c prevent bad page break with this line
598 Here are run-time target specifications.
599
600 @defmac TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS ()
601 This function-like macro expands to a block of code that defines
602 built-in preprocessor macros and assertions for the target CPU, using
603 the functions @code{builtin_define}, @code{builtin_define_std} and
604 @code{builtin_assert}. When the front end
605 calls this macro it provides a trailing semicolon, and since it has
606 finished command line option processing your code can use those
607 results freely.
608
609 @code{builtin_assert} takes a string in the form you pass to the
610 command-line option @option{-A}, such as @code{cpu=mips}, and creates
611 the assertion. @code{builtin_define} takes a string in the form
612 accepted by option @option{-D} and unconditionally defines the macro.
613
614 @code{builtin_define_std} takes a string representing the name of an
615 object-like macro. If it doesn't lie in the user's namespace,
616 @code{builtin_define_std} defines it unconditionally. Otherwise, it
617 defines a version with two leading underscores, and another version
618 with two leading and trailing underscores, and defines the original
619 only if an ISO standard was not requested on the command line. For
620 example, passing @code{unix} defines @code{__unix}, @code{__unix__}
621 and possibly @code{unix}; passing @code{_mips} defines @code{__mips},
622 @code{__mips__} and possibly @code{_mips}, and passing @code{_ABI64}
623 defines only @code{_ABI64}.
624
625 You can also test for the C dialect being compiled. The variable
626 @code{c_language} is set to one of @code{clk_c}, @code{clk_cplusplus}
627 or @code{clk_objective_c}. Note that if we are preprocessing
628 assembler, this variable will be @code{clk_c} but the function-like
629 macro @code{preprocessing_asm_p()} will return true, so you might want
630 to check for that first. If you need to check for strict ANSI, the
631 variable @code{flag_iso} can be used. The function-like macro
632 @code{preprocessing_trad_p()} can be used to check for traditional
633 preprocessing.
634 @end defmac
635
636 @defmac TARGET_OS_CPP_BUILTINS ()
637 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
638 and is used for the target operating system instead.
639 @end defmac
640
641 @defmac TARGET_OBJFMT_CPP_BUILTINS ()
642 Similarly to @code{TARGET_CPU_CPP_BUILTINS} but this macro is optional
643 and is used for the target object format. @file{elfos.h} uses this
644 macro to define @code{__ELF__}, so you probably do not need to define
645 it yourself.
646 @end defmac
647
648 @deftypevar {extern int} target_flags
649 This variable is declared in @file{options.h}, which is included before
650 any target-specific headers.
651 @end deftypevar
652
653 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_TARGET_FLAGS
654 This variable specifies the initial value of @code{target_flags}.
655 Its default setting is 0.
656 @end deftypevr
657
658 @cindex optional hardware or system features
659 @cindex features, optional, in system conventions
660
661 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION
662 This hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
663 target-specific options described by the @file{.opt} definition files
664 (@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some option-specific
665 processing and should return true if the option is valid. The default
666 definition does nothing but return true.
667
668 @var{decoded} specifies the option and its arguments. @var{opts} and
669 @var{opts_set} are the @code{gcc_options} structures to be used for
670 storing option state, and @var{loc} is the location at which the
671 option was passed (@code{UNKNOWN_LOCATION} except for options passed
672 via attributes).
673 @end deftypefn
674
675 @hook TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION
676 This target hook is called whenever the user specifies one of the
677 target-specific C language family options described by the @file{.opt}
678 definition files(@pxref{Options}). It has the opportunity to do some
679 option-specific processing and should return true if the option is
680 valid. The arguments are like for @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION}. The
681 default definition does nothing but return false.
682
683 In general, you should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_OPTION} to handle
684 options. However, if processing an option requires routines that are
685 only available in the C (and related language) front ends, then you
686 should use @code{TARGET_HANDLE_C_OPTION} instead.
687 @end deftypefn
688
689 @hook TARGET_OBJC_CONSTRUCT_STRING_OBJECT
690
691 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_UNRESOLVED_CLASS_REFERENCE
692
693 @hook TARGET_OBJC_DECLARE_CLASS_DEFINITION
694
695 @hook TARGET_STRING_OBJECT_REF_TYPE_P
696
697 @hook TARGET_CHECK_STRING_OBJECT_FORMAT_ARG
698
699 @hook TARGET_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS_AFTER_CHANGE
700
701 @defmac C_COMMON_OVERRIDE_OPTIONS
702 This is similar to the @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE} hook
703 but is only used in the C
704 language frontends (C, Objective-C, C++, Objective-C++) and so can be
705 used to alter option flag variables which only exist in those
706 frontends.
707 @end defmac
708
709 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION_TABLE
710 Some machines may desire to change what optimizations are performed for
711 various optimization levels. This variable, if defined, describes
712 options to enable at particular sets of optimization levels. These
713 options are processed once
714 just after the optimization level is determined and before the remainder
715 of the command options have been parsed, so may be overridden by other
716 options passed explicitly.
717
718 This processing is run once at program startup and when the optimization
719 options are changed via @code{#pragma GCC optimize} or by using the
720 @code{optimize} attribute.
721 @end deftypevr
722
723 @hook TARGET_OPTION_INIT_STRUCT
724
725 @hook TARGET_OPTION_DEFAULT_PARAMS
726
727 @defmac SWITCHABLE_TARGET
728 Some targets need to switch between substantially different subtargets
729 during compilation. For example, the MIPS target has one subtarget for
730 the traditional MIPS architecture and another for MIPS16. Source code
731 can switch between these two subarchitectures using the @code{mips16}
732 and @code{nomips16} attributes.
733
734 Such subtargets can differ in things like the set of available
735 registers, the set of available instructions, the costs of various
736 operations, and so on. GCC caches a lot of this type of information
737 in global variables, and recomputing them for each subtarget takes a
738 significant amount of time. The compiler therefore provides a facility
739 for maintaining several versions of the global variables and quickly
740 switching between them; see @file{target-globals.h} for details.
741
742 Define this macro to 1 if your target needs this facility. The default
743 is 0.
744 @end defmac
745
746 @hook TARGET_FLOAT_EXCEPTIONS_ROUNDING_SUPPORTED_P
747
748 @node Per-Function Data
749 @section Defining data structures for per-function information.
750 @cindex per-function data
751 @cindex data structures
752
753 If the target needs to store information on a per-function basis, GCC
754 provides a macro and a couple of variables to allow this. Note, just
755 using statics to store the information is a bad idea, since GCC supports
756 nested functions, so you can be halfway through encoding one function
757 when another one comes along.
758
759 GCC defines a data structure called @code{struct function} which
760 contains all of the data specific to an individual function. This
761 structure contains a field called @code{machine} whose type is
762 @code{struct machine_function *}, which can be used by targets to point
763 to their own specific data.
764
765 If a target needs per-function specific data it should define the type
766 @code{struct machine_function} and also the macro @code{INIT_EXPANDERS}.
767 This macro should be used to initialize the function pointer
768 @code{init_machine_status}. This pointer is explained below.
769
770 One typical use of per-function, target specific data is to create an
771 RTX to hold the register containing the function's return address. This
772 RTX can then be used to implement the @code{__builtin_return_address}
773 function, for level 0.
774
775 Note---earlier implementations of GCC used a single data area to hold
776 all of the per-function information. Thus when processing of a nested
777 function began the old per-function data had to be pushed onto a
778 stack, and when the processing was finished, it had to be popped off the
779 stack. GCC used to provide function pointers called
780 @code{save_machine_status} and @code{restore_machine_status} to handle
781 the saving and restoring of the target specific information. Since the
782 single data area approach is no longer used, these pointers are no
783 longer supported.
784
785 @defmac INIT_EXPANDERS
786 Macro called to initialize any target specific information. This macro
787 is called once per function, before generation of any RTL has begun.
788 The intention of this macro is to allow the initialization of the
789 function pointer @code{init_machine_status}.
790 @end defmac
791
792 @deftypevar {void (*)(struct function *)} init_machine_status
793 If this function pointer is non-@code{NULL} it will be called once per
794 function, before function compilation starts, in order to allow the
795 target to perform any target specific initialization of the
796 @code{struct function} structure. It is intended that this would be
797 used to initialize the @code{machine} of that structure.
798
799 @code{struct machine_function} structures are expected to be freed by GC@.
800 Generally, any memory that they reference must be allocated by using
801 GC allocation, including the structure itself.
802 @end deftypevar
803
804 @node Storage Layout
805 @section Storage Layout
806 @cindex storage layout
807
808 Note that the definitions of the macros in this table which are sizes or
809 alignments measured in bits do not need to be constant. They can be C
810 expressions that refer to static variables, such as the @code{target_flags}.
811 @xref{Run-time Target}.
812
813 @defmac BITS_BIG_ENDIAN
814 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant bit in a
815 byte has the lowest number; otherwise define it to have the value zero.
816 This means that bit-field instructions count from the most significant
817 bit. If the machine has no bit-field instructions, then this must still
818 be defined, but it doesn't matter which value it is defined to. This
819 macro need not be a constant.
820
821 This macro does not affect the way structure fields are packed into
822 bytes or words; that is controlled by @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN}.
823 @end defmac
824
825 @defmac BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN
826 Define this macro to have the value 1 if the most significant byte in a
827 word has the lowest number. This macro need not be a constant.
828 @end defmac
829
830 @defmac WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
831 Define this macro to have the value 1 if, in a multiword object, the
832 most significant word has the lowest number. This applies to both
833 memory locations and registers; see @code{REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} if the
834 order of words in memory is not the same as the order in registers. This
835 macro need not be a constant.
836 @end defmac
837
838 @defmac REG_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
839 On some machines, the order of words in a multiword object differs between
840 registers in memory. In such a situation, define this macro to describe
841 the order of words in a register. The macro @code{WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN} controls
842 the order of words in memory.
843 @end defmac
844
845 @defmac FLOAT_WORDS_BIG_ENDIAN
846 Define this macro to have the value 1 if @code{DFmode}, @code{XFmode} or
847 @code{TFmode} floating point numbers are stored in memory with the word
848 containing the sign bit at the lowest address; otherwise define it to
849 have the value 0. This macro need not be a constant.
850
851 You need not define this macro if the ordering is the same as for
852 multi-word integers.
853 @end defmac
854
855 @defmac BITS_PER_WORD
856 Number of bits in a word. If you do not define this macro, the default
857 is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * UNITS_PER_WORD}.
858 @end defmac
859
860 @defmac MAX_BITS_PER_WORD
861 Maximum number of bits in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
862 @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
863 largest value that @code{BITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
864 @end defmac
865
866 @defmac UNITS_PER_WORD
867 Number of storage units in a word; normally the size of a general-purpose
868 register, a power of two from 1 or 8.
869 @end defmac
870
871 @defmac MIN_UNITS_PER_WORD
872 Minimum number of units in a word. If this is undefined, the default is
873 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. Otherwise, it is the constant value that is the
874 smallest value that @code{UNITS_PER_WORD} can have at run-time.
875 @end defmac
876
877 @defmac POINTER_SIZE
878 Width of a pointer, in bits. You must specify a value no wider than the
879 width of @code{Pmode}. If it is not equal to the width of @code{Pmode},
880 you must define @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED}. If you do not specify
881 a value the default is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
882 @end defmac
883
884 @defmac POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED
885 A C expression that determines how pointers should be extended from
886 @code{ptr_mode} to either @code{Pmode} or @code{word_mode}. It is
887 greater than zero if pointers should be zero-extended, zero if they
888 should be sign-extended, and negative if some other sort of conversion
889 is needed. In the last case, the extension is done by the target's
890 @code{ptr_extend} instruction.
891
892 You need not define this macro if the @code{ptr_mode}, @code{Pmode}
893 and @code{word_mode} are all the same width.
894 @end defmac
895
896 @defmac PROMOTE_MODE (@var{m}, @var{unsignedp}, @var{type})
897 A macro to update @var{m} and @var{unsignedp} when an object whose type
898 is @var{type} and which has the specified mode and signedness is to be
899 stored in a register. This macro is only called when @var{type} is a
900 scalar type.
901
902 On most RISC machines, which only have operations that operate on a full
903 register, define this macro to set @var{m} to @code{word_mode} if
904 @var{m} is an integer mode narrower than @code{BITS_PER_WORD}. In most
905 cases, only integer modes should be widened because wider-precision
906 floating-point operations are usually more expensive than their narrower
907 counterparts.
908
909 For most machines, the macro definition does not change @var{unsignedp}.
910 However, some machines, have instructions that preferentially handle
911 either signed or unsigned quantities of certain modes. For example, on
912 the DEC Alpha, 32-bit loads from memory and 32-bit add instructions
913 sign-extend the result to 64 bits. On such machines, set
914 @var{unsignedp} according to which kind of extension is more efficient.
915
916 Do not define this macro if it would never modify @var{m}.
917 @end defmac
918
919 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_FUNCTION_MODE
920
921 @defmac PARM_BOUNDARY
922 Normal alignment required for function parameters on the stack, in
923 bits. All stack parameters receive at least this much alignment
924 regardless of data type. On most machines, this is the same as the
925 size of an integer.
926 @end defmac
927
928 @defmac STACK_BOUNDARY
929 Define this macro to the minimum alignment enforced by hardware for the
930 stack pointer on this machine. The definition is a C expression for the
931 desired alignment (measured in bits). This value is used as a default
932 if @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY} is not defined. On most machines,
933 this should be the same as @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}.
934 @end defmac
935
936 @defmac PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY
937 Define this macro if you wish to preserve a certain alignment for the
938 stack pointer, greater than what the hardware enforces. The definition
939 is a C expression for the desired alignment (measured in bits). This
940 macro must evaluate to a value equal to or larger than
941 @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
942 @end defmac
943
944 @defmac INCOMING_STACK_BOUNDARY
945 Define this macro if the incoming stack boundary may be different
946 from @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}. This macro must evaluate
947 to a value equal to or larger than @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
948 @end defmac
949
950 @defmac FUNCTION_BOUNDARY
951 Alignment required for a function entry point, in bits.
952 @end defmac
953
954 @defmac BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT
955 Biggest alignment that any data type can require on this machine, in
956 bits. Note that this is not the biggest alignment that is supported,
957 just the biggest alignment that, when violated, may cause a fault.
958 @end defmac
959
960 @defmac MALLOC_ABI_ALIGNMENT
961 Alignment, in bits, a C conformant malloc implementation has to
962 provide. If not defined, the default value is @code{BITS_PER_WORD}.
963 @end defmac
964
965 @defmac ATTRIBUTE_ALIGNED_VALUE
966 Alignment used by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned))} construct. If
967 not defined, the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
968 @end defmac
969
970 @defmac MINIMUM_ATOMIC_ALIGNMENT
971 If defined, the smallest alignment, in bits, that can be given to an
972 object that can be referenced in one operation, without disturbing any
973 nearby object. Normally, this is @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}, but may be larger
974 on machines that don't have byte or half-word store operations.
975 @end defmac
976
977 @defmac BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT
978 Biggest alignment that any structure or union field can require on this
979 machine, in bits. If defined, this overrides @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} for
980 structure and union fields only, unless the field alignment has been set
981 by the @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
982 @end defmac
983
984 @defmac ADJUST_FIELD_ALIGN (@var{field}, @var{computed})
985 An expression for the alignment of a structure field @var{field} if the
986 alignment computed in the usual way (including applying of
987 @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT} and @code{BIGGEST_FIELD_ALIGNMENT} to the
988 alignment) is @var{computed}. It overrides alignment only if the
989 field alignment has not been set by the
990 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct.
991 @end defmac
992
993 @defmac MAX_STACK_ALIGNMENT
994 Biggest stack alignment guaranteed by the backend. Use this macro
995 to specify the maximum alignment of a variable on stack.
996
997 If not defined, the default value is @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}.
998
999 @c FIXME: The default should be @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}.
1000 @c But the fix for PR 32893 indicates that we can only guarantee
1001 @c maximum stack alignment on stack up to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, not
1002 @c @code{PREFERRED_STACK_BOUNDARY}, if stack alignment isn't supported.
1003 @end defmac
1004
1005 @defmac MAX_OFILE_ALIGNMENT
1006 Biggest alignment supported by the object file format of this machine.
1007 Use this macro to limit the alignment which can be specified using the
1008 @code{__attribute__ ((aligned (@var{n})))} construct. If not defined,
1009 the default value is @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1010
1011 On systems that use ELF, the default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is
1012 the largest supported 32-bit ELF section alignment representable on
1013 a 32-bit host e.g. @samp{(((uint64_t) 1 << 28) * 8)}.
1014 On 32-bit ELF the largest supported section alignment in bits is
1015 @samp{(0x80000000 * 8)}, but this is not representable on 32-bit hosts.
1016 @end defmac
1017
1018 @defmac DATA_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1019 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1020 the static store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1021 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1022 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1023
1024 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1025
1026 @findex strcpy
1027 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1028 make it all fit in fewer cache lines. Another is to cause character
1029 arrays to be word-aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1030 constants to character arrays can be done inline.
1031 @end defmac
1032
1033 @defmac DATA_ABI_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1034 Similar to @code{DATA_ALIGNMENT}, but for the cases where the ABI mandates
1035 some alignment increase, instead of optimization only purposes. E.g.@
1036 AMD x86-64 psABI says that variables with array type larger than 15 bytes
1037 must be aligned to 16 byte boundaries.
1038
1039 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1040 @end defmac
1041
1042 @defmac CONSTANT_ALIGNMENT (@var{constant}, @var{basic-align})
1043 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment given to a constant
1044 that is being placed in memory. @var{constant} is the constant and
1045 @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the object would ordinarily
1046 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1047 align the object.
1048
1049 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1050
1051 The typical use of this macro is to increase alignment for string
1052 constants to be word aligned so that @code{strcpy} calls that copy
1053 constants can be done inline.
1054 @end defmac
1055
1056 @defmac LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{basic-align})
1057 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a variable in
1058 the local store. @var{type} is the data type, and @var{basic-align} is
1059 the alignment that the object would ordinarily have. The value of this
1060 macro is used instead of that alignment to align the object.
1061
1062 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used.
1063
1064 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1065 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1066
1067 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1068 @end defmac
1069
1070 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT
1071
1072 @defmac STACK_SLOT_ALIGNMENT (@var{type}, @var{mode}, @var{basic-align})
1073 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for stack slot.
1074 @var{type} is the data type, @var{mode} is the widest mode available,
1075 and @var{basic-align} is the alignment that the slot would ordinarily
1076 have. The value of this macro is used instead of that alignment to
1077 align the slot.
1078
1079 If this macro is not defined, then @var{basic-align} is used when
1080 @var{type} is @code{NULL}. Otherwise, @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT} will
1081 be used.
1082
1083 This macro is to set alignment of stack slot to the maximum alignment
1084 of all possible modes which the slot may have.
1085
1086 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1087 @end defmac
1088
1089 @defmac LOCAL_DECL_ALIGNMENT (@var{decl})
1090 If defined, a C expression to compute the alignment for a local
1091 variable @var{decl}.
1092
1093 If this macro is not defined, then
1094 @code{LOCAL_ALIGNMENT (TREE_TYPE (@var{decl}), DECL_ALIGN (@var{decl}))}
1095 is used.
1096
1097 One use of this macro is to increase alignment of medium-size data to
1098 make it all fit in fewer cache lines.
1099
1100 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
1101 @end defmac
1102
1103 @defmac MINIMUM_ALIGNMENT (@var{exp}, @var{mode}, @var{align})
1104 If defined, a C expression to compute the minimum required alignment
1105 for dynamic stack realignment purposes for @var{exp} (a type or decl),
1106 @var{mode}, assuming normal alignment @var{align}.
1107
1108 If this macro is not defined, then @var{align} will be used.
1109 @end defmac
1110
1111 @defmac EMPTY_FIELD_BOUNDARY
1112 Alignment in bits to be given to a structure bit-field that follows an
1113 empty field such as @code{int : 0;}.
1114
1115 If @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} is true, it overrides this macro.
1116 @end defmac
1117
1118 @defmac STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY
1119 Number of bits which any structure or union's size must be a multiple of.
1120 Each structure or union's size is rounded up to a multiple of this.
1121
1122 If you do not define this macro, the default is the same as
1123 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1124 @end defmac
1125
1126 @defmac STRICT_ALIGNMENT
1127 Define this macro to be the value 1 if instructions will fail to work
1128 if given data not on the nominal alignment. If instructions will merely
1129 go slower in that case, define this macro as 0.
1130 @end defmac
1131
1132 @defmac PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS
1133 Define this if you wish to imitate the way many other C compilers handle
1134 alignment of bit-fields and the structures that contain them.
1135
1136 The behavior is that the type written for a named bit-field (@code{int},
1137 @code{short}, or other integer type) imposes an alignment for the entire
1138 structure, as if the structure really did contain an ordinary field of
1139 that type. In addition, the bit-field is placed within the structure so
1140 that it would fit within such a field, not crossing a boundary for it.
1141
1142 Thus, on most machines, a named bit-field whose type is written as
1143 @code{int} would not cross a four-byte boundary, and would force
1144 four-byte alignment for the whole structure. (The alignment used may
1145 not be four bytes; it is controlled by the other alignment parameters.)
1146
1147 An unnamed bit-field will not affect the alignment of the containing
1148 structure.
1149
1150 If the macro is defined, its definition should be a C expression;
1151 a nonzero value for the expression enables this behavior.
1152
1153 Note that if this macro is not defined, or its value is zero, some
1154 bit-fields may cross more than one alignment boundary. The compiler can
1155 support such references if there are @samp{insv}, @samp{extv}, and
1156 @samp{extzv} insns that can directly reference memory.
1157
1158 The other known way of making bit-fields work is to define
1159 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} as large as @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}.
1160 Then every structure can be accessed with fullwords.
1161
1162 Unless the machine has bit-field instructions or you define
1163 @code{STRUCTURE_SIZE_BOUNDARY} that way, you must define
1164 @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} to have a nonzero value.
1165
1166 If your aim is to make GCC use the same conventions for laying out
1167 bit-fields as are used by another compiler, here is how to investigate
1168 what the other compiler does. Compile and run this program:
1169
1170 @smallexample
1171 struct foo1
1172 @{
1173 char x;
1174 char :0;
1175 char y;
1176 @};
1177
1178 struct foo2
1179 @{
1180 char x;
1181 int :0;
1182 char y;
1183 @};
1184
1185 main ()
1186 @{
1187 printf ("Size of foo1 is %d\n",
1188 sizeof (struct foo1));
1189 printf ("Size of foo2 is %d\n",
1190 sizeof (struct foo2));
1191 exit (0);
1192 @}
1193 @end smallexample
1194
1195 If this prints 2 and 5, then the compiler's behavior is what you would
1196 get from @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS}.
1197 @end defmac
1198
1199 @defmac BITFIELD_NBYTES_LIMITED
1200 Like @code{PCC_BITFIELD_TYPE_MATTERS} except that its effect is limited
1201 to aligning a bit-field within the structure.
1202 @end defmac
1203
1204 @hook TARGET_ALIGN_ANON_BITFIELD
1205
1206 @hook TARGET_NARROW_VOLATILE_BITFIELD
1207
1208 @hook TARGET_MEMBER_TYPE_FORCES_BLK
1209
1210 @defmac ROUND_TYPE_ALIGN (@var{type}, @var{computed}, @var{specified})
1211 Define this macro as an expression for the alignment of a type (given
1212 by @var{type} as a tree node) if the alignment computed in the usual
1213 way is @var{computed} and the alignment explicitly specified was
1214 @var{specified}.
1215
1216 The default is to use @var{specified} if it is larger; otherwise, use
1217 the smaller of @var{computed} and @code{BIGGEST_ALIGNMENT}
1218 @end defmac
1219
1220 @defmac MAX_FIXED_MODE_SIZE
1221 An integer expression for the size in bits of the largest integer
1222 machine mode that should actually be used. All integer machine modes of
1223 this size or smaller can be used for structures and unions with the
1224 appropriate sizes. If this macro is undefined, @code{GET_MODE_BITSIZE
1225 (DImode)} is assumed.
1226 @end defmac
1227
1228 @defmac STACK_SAVEAREA_MODE (@var{save_level})
1229 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1230 specifies the mode of the save area operand of a
1231 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1232 @var{save_level} is one of @code{SAVE_BLOCK}, @code{SAVE_FUNCTION}, or
1233 @code{SAVE_NONLOCAL} and selects which of the three named patterns is
1234 having its mode specified.
1235
1236 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{Pmode}. You
1237 would most commonly define this macro if the
1238 @code{save_stack_@var{level}} patterns need to support both a 32- and a
1239 64-bit mode.
1240 @end defmac
1241
1242 @defmac STACK_SIZE_MODE
1243 If defined, an expression of type @code{machine_mode} that
1244 specifies the mode of the size increment operand of an
1245 @code{allocate_stack} named pattern (@pxref{Standard Names}).
1246
1247 You need not define this macro if it always returns @code{word_mode}.
1248 You would most commonly define this macro if the @code{allocate_stack}
1249 pattern needs to support both a 32- and a 64-bit mode.
1250 @end defmac
1251
1252 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_CMP_RETURN_MODE
1253
1254 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_SHIFT_COUNT_MODE
1255
1256 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_WORD_MODE
1257
1258 @hook TARGET_MS_BITFIELD_LAYOUT_P
1259
1260 @hook TARGET_DECIMAL_FLOAT_SUPPORTED_P
1261
1262 @hook TARGET_FIXED_POINT_SUPPORTED_P
1263
1264 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_TO_RTL_HOOK
1265
1266 @hook TARGET_INSTANTIATE_DECLS
1267
1268 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_TYPE
1269
1270 @node Type Layout
1271 @section Layout of Source Language Data Types
1272
1273 These macros define the sizes and other characteristics of the standard
1274 basic data types used in programs being compiled. Unlike the macros in
1275 the previous section, these apply to specific features of C and related
1276 languages, rather than to fundamental aspects of storage layout.
1277
1278 @defmac INT_TYPE_SIZE
1279 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{int} on the
1280 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1281 @end defmac
1282
1283 @defmac SHORT_TYPE_SIZE
1284 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short} on the
1285 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is half a word.
1286 (If this would be less than one storage unit, it is rounded up to one
1287 unit.)
1288 @end defmac
1289
1290 @defmac LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1291 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long} on the
1292 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1293 @end defmac
1294
1295 @defmac ADA_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1296 On some machines, the size used for the Ada equivalent of the type
1297 @code{long} by a native Ada compiler differs from that used by C@. In
1298 that situation, define this macro to be a C expression to be used for
1299 the size of that type. If you don't define this, the default is the
1300 value of @code{LONG_TYPE_SIZE}.
1301 @end defmac
1302
1303 @defmac LONG_LONG_TYPE_SIZE
1304 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long} on the
1305 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1306 words. If you want to support GNU Ada on your machine, the value of this
1307 macro must be at least 64.
1308 @end defmac
1309
1310 @defmac CHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1311 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{char} on the
1312 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1313 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1314 @end defmac
1315
1316 @defmac BOOL_TYPE_SIZE
1317 A C expression for the size in bits of the C++ type @code{bool} and
1318 C99 type @code{_Bool} on the target machine. If you don't define
1319 this, and you probably shouldn't, the default is @code{CHAR_TYPE_SIZE}.
1320 @end defmac
1321
1322 @defmac FLOAT_TYPE_SIZE
1323 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{float} on the
1324 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is one word.
1325 @end defmac
1326
1327 @defmac DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1328 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{double} on the
1329 target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1330 words.
1331 @end defmac
1332
1333 @defmac LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE
1334 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long double} on
1335 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is two
1336 words.
1337 @end defmac
1338
1339 @defmac SHORT_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1340 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Fract} on
1341 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1342 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT}.
1343 @end defmac
1344
1345 @defmac FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1346 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Fract} on
1347 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1348 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1349 @end defmac
1350
1351 @defmac LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1352 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Fract} on
1353 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1354 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1355 @end defmac
1356
1357 @defmac LONG_LONG_FRACT_TYPE_SIZE
1358 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Fract} on
1359 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1360 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1361 @end defmac
1362
1363 @defmac SHORT_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1364 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{short _Accum} on
1365 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1366 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 2}.
1367 @end defmac
1368
1369 @defmac ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1370 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{_Accum} on
1371 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1372 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 4}.
1373 @end defmac
1374
1375 @defmac LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1376 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long _Accum} on
1377 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1378 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 8}.
1379 @end defmac
1380
1381 @defmac LONG_LONG_ACCUM_TYPE_SIZE
1382 A C expression for the size in bits of the type @code{long long _Accum} on
1383 the target machine. If you don't define this, the default is
1384 @code{BITS_PER_UNIT * 16}.
1385 @end defmac
1386
1387 @defmac LIBGCC2_GNU_PREFIX
1388 This macro corresponds to the @code{TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX} target
1389 hook and should be defined if that hook is overriden to be true. It
1390 causes function names in libgcc to be changed to use a @code{__gnu_}
1391 prefix for their name rather than the default @code{__}. A port which
1392 uses this macro should also arrange to use @file{t-gnu-prefix} in
1393 the libgcc @file{config.host}.
1394 @end defmac
1395
1396 @defmac TARGET_FLT_EVAL_METHOD
1397 A C expression for the value for @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} in @file{float.h},
1398 assuming, if applicable, that the floating-point control word is in its
1399 default state. If you do not define this macro the value of
1400 @code{FLT_EVAL_METHOD} will be zero.
1401 @end defmac
1402
1403 @defmac WIDEST_HARDWARE_FP_SIZE
1404 A C expression for the size in bits of the widest floating-point format
1405 supported by the hardware. If you define this macro, you must specify a
1406 value less than or equal to the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}.
1407 If you do not define this macro, the value of @code{LONG_DOUBLE_TYPE_SIZE}
1408 is the default.
1409 @end defmac
1410
1411 @defmac DEFAULT_SIGNED_CHAR
1412 An expression whose value is 1 or 0, according to whether the type
1413 @code{char} should be signed or unsigned by default. The user can
1414 always override this default with the options @option{-fsigned-char}
1415 and @option{-funsigned-char}.
1416 @end defmac
1417
1418 @hook TARGET_DEFAULT_SHORT_ENUMS
1419
1420 @defmac SIZE_TYPE
1421 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1422 for size values. The typedef name @code{size_t} is defined using the
1423 contents of the string.
1424
1425 The string can contain more than one keyword. If so, separate them with
1426 spaces, and write first any length keyword, then @code{unsigned} if
1427 appropriate, and finally @code{int}. The string must exactly match one
1428 of the data type names defined in the function
1429 @code{c_common_nodes_and_builtins} in the file @file{c-family/c-common.c}.
1430 You may not omit @code{int} or change the order---that would cause the
1431 compiler to crash on startup.
1432
1433 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long unsigned
1434 int"}.
1435 @end defmac
1436
1437 @defmac SIZETYPE
1438 GCC defines internal types (@code{sizetype}, @code{ssizetype},
1439 @code{bitsizetype} and @code{sbitsizetype}) for expressions
1440 dealing with size. This macro is a C expression for a string describing
1441 the name of the data type from which the precision of @code{sizetype}
1442 is extracted.
1443
1444 The string has the same restrictions as @code{SIZE_TYPE} string.
1445
1446 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{SIZE_TYPE}.
1447 @end defmac
1448
1449 @defmac PTRDIFF_TYPE
1450 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1451 for the result of subtracting two pointers. The typedef name
1452 @code{ptrdiff_t} is defined using the contents of the string. See
1453 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1454
1455 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"long int"}.
1456 @end defmac
1457
1458 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE
1459 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to use
1460 for wide characters. The typedef name @code{wchar_t} is defined using
1461 the contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1462 information.
1463
1464 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"int"}.
1465 @end defmac
1466
1467 @defmac WCHAR_TYPE_SIZE
1468 A C expression for the size in bits of the data type for wide
1469 characters. This is used in @code{cpp}, which cannot make use of
1470 @code{WCHAR_TYPE}.
1471 @end defmac
1472
1473 @defmac WINT_TYPE
1474 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type to
1475 use for wide characters passed to @code{printf} and returned from
1476 @code{getwc}. The typedef name @code{wint_t} is defined using the
1477 contents of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more
1478 information.
1479
1480 If you don't define this macro, the default is @code{"unsigned int"}.
1481 @end defmac
1482
1483 @defmac INTMAX_TYPE
1484 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1485 can represent any value of any standard or extended signed integer type.
1486 The typedef name @code{intmax_t} is defined using the contents of the
1487 string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1488
1489 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1490 @code{"int"}, @code{"long int"}, or @code{"long long int"} that has as
1491 much precision as @code{long long int}.
1492 @end defmac
1493
1494 @defmac UINTMAX_TYPE
1495 A C expression for a string describing the name of the data type that
1496 can represent any value of any standard or extended unsigned integer
1497 type. The typedef name @code{uintmax_t} is defined using the contents
1498 of the string. See @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1499
1500 If you don't define this macro, the default is the first of
1501 @code{"unsigned int"}, @code{"long unsigned int"}, or @code{"long long
1502 unsigned int"} that has as much precision as @code{long long unsigned
1503 int}.
1504 @end defmac
1505
1506 @defmac SIG_ATOMIC_TYPE
1507 @defmacx INT8_TYPE
1508 @defmacx INT16_TYPE
1509 @defmacx INT32_TYPE
1510 @defmacx INT64_TYPE
1511 @defmacx UINT8_TYPE
1512 @defmacx UINT16_TYPE
1513 @defmacx UINT32_TYPE
1514 @defmacx UINT64_TYPE
1515 @defmacx INT_LEAST8_TYPE
1516 @defmacx INT_LEAST16_TYPE
1517 @defmacx INT_LEAST32_TYPE
1518 @defmacx INT_LEAST64_TYPE
1519 @defmacx UINT_LEAST8_TYPE
1520 @defmacx UINT_LEAST16_TYPE
1521 @defmacx UINT_LEAST32_TYPE
1522 @defmacx UINT_LEAST64_TYPE
1523 @defmacx INT_FAST8_TYPE
1524 @defmacx INT_FAST16_TYPE
1525 @defmacx INT_FAST32_TYPE
1526 @defmacx INT_FAST64_TYPE
1527 @defmacx UINT_FAST8_TYPE
1528 @defmacx UINT_FAST16_TYPE
1529 @defmacx UINT_FAST32_TYPE
1530 @defmacx UINT_FAST64_TYPE
1531 @defmacx INTPTR_TYPE
1532 @defmacx UINTPTR_TYPE
1533 C expressions for the standard types @code{sig_atomic_t},
1534 @code{int8_t}, @code{int16_t}, @code{int32_t}, @code{int64_t},
1535 @code{uint8_t}, @code{uint16_t}, @code{uint32_t}, @code{uint64_t},
1536 @code{int_least8_t}, @code{int_least16_t}, @code{int_least32_t},
1537 @code{int_least64_t}, @code{uint_least8_t}, @code{uint_least16_t},
1538 @code{uint_least32_t}, @code{uint_least64_t}, @code{int_fast8_t},
1539 @code{int_fast16_t}, @code{int_fast32_t}, @code{int_fast64_t},
1540 @code{uint_fast8_t}, @code{uint_fast16_t}, @code{uint_fast32_t},
1541 @code{uint_fast64_t}, @code{intptr_t}, and @code{uintptr_t}. See
1542 @code{SIZE_TYPE} above for more information.
1543
1544 If any of these macros evaluates to a null pointer, the corresponding
1545 type is not supported; if GCC is configured to provide
1546 @code{<stdint.h>} in such a case, the header provided may not conform
1547 to C99, depending on the type in question. The defaults for all of
1548 these macros are null pointers.
1549 @end defmac
1550
1551 @defmac TARGET_PTRMEMFUNC_VBIT_LOCATION
1552 The C++ compiler represents a pointer-to-member-function with a struct
1553 that looks like:
1554
1555 @smallexample
1556 struct @{
1557 union @{
1558 void (*fn)();
1559 ptrdiff_t vtable_index;
1560 @};
1561 ptrdiff_t delta;
1562 @};
1563 @end smallexample
1564
1565 @noindent
1566 The C++ compiler must use one bit to indicate whether the function that
1567 will be called through a pointer-to-member-function is virtual.
1568 Normally, we assume that the low-order bit of a function pointer must
1569 always be zero. Then, by ensuring that the vtable_index is odd, we can
1570 distinguish which variant of the union is in use. But, on some
1571 platforms function pointers can be odd, and so this doesn't work. In
1572 that case, we use the low-order bit of the @code{delta} field, and shift
1573 the remainder of the @code{delta} field to the left.
1574
1575 GCC will automatically make the right selection about where to store
1576 this bit using the @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY} setting for your platform.
1577 However, some platforms such as ARM/Thumb have @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}
1578 set such that functions always start at even addresses, but the lowest
1579 bit of pointers to functions indicate whether the function at that
1580 address is in ARM or Thumb mode. If this is the case of your
1581 architecture, you should define this macro to
1582 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_delta}.
1583
1584 In general, you should not have to define this macro. On architectures
1585 in which function addresses are always even, according to
1586 @code{FUNCTION_BOUNDARY}, GCC will automatically define this macro to
1587 @code{ptrmemfunc_vbit_in_pfn}.
1588 @end defmac
1589
1590 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS
1591 Normally, the C++ compiler uses function pointers in vtables. This
1592 macro allows the target to change to use ``function descriptors''
1593 instead. Function descriptors are found on targets for whom a
1594 function pointer is actually a small data structure. Normally the
1595 data structure consists of the actual code address plus a data
1596 pointer to which the function's data is relative.
1597
1598 If vtables are used, the value of this macro should be the number
1599 of words that the function descriptor occupies.
1600 @end defmac
1601
1602 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN
1603 By default, the vtable entries are void pointers, the so the alignment
1604 is the same as pointer alignment. The value of this macro specifies
1605 the alignment of the vtable entry in bits. It should be defined only
1606 when special alignment is necessary. */
1607 @end defmac
1608
1609 @defmac TARGET_VTABLE_DATA_ENTRY_DISTANCE
1610 There are a few non-descriptor entries in the vtable at offsets below
1611 zero. If these entries must be padded (say, to preserve the alignment
1612 specified by @code{TARGET_VTABLE_ENTRY_ALIGN}), set this to the number
1613 of words in each data entry.
1614 @end defmac
1615
1616 @node Registers
1617 @section Register Usage
1618 @cindex register usage
1619
1620 This section explains how to describe what registers the target machine
1621 has, and how (in general) they can be used.
1622
1623 The description of which registers a specific instruction can use is
1624 done with register classes; see @ref{Register Classes}. For information
1625 on using registers to access a stack frame, see @ref{Frame Registers}.
1626 For passing values in registers, see @ref{Register Arguments}.
1627 For returning values in registers, see @ref{Scalar Return}.
1628
1629 @menu
1630 * Register Basics:: Number and kinds of registers.
1631 * Allocation Order:: Order in which registers are allocated.
1632 * Values in Registers:: What kinds of values each reg can hold.
1633 * Leaf Functions:: Renumbering registers for leaf functions.
1634 * Stack Registers:: Handling a register stack such as 80387.
1635 @end menu
1636
1637 @node Register Basics
1638 @subsection Basic Characteristics of Registers
1639
1640 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1641 Registers have various characteristics.
1642
1643 @defmac FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER
1644 Number of hardware registers known to the compiler. They receive
1645 numbers 0 through @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER-1}; thus, the first
1646 pseudo register's number really is assigned the number
1647 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
1648 @end defmac
1649
1650 @defmac FIXED_REGISTERS
1651 @cindex fixed register
1652 An initializer that says which registers are used for fixed purposes
1653 all throughout the compiled code and are therefore not available for
1654 general allocation. These would include the stack pointer, the frame
1655 pointer (except on machines where that can be used as a general
1656 register when no frame pointer is needed), the program counter on
1657 machines where that is considered one of the addressable registers,
1658 and any other numbered register with a standard use.
1659
1660 This information is expressed as a sequence of numbers, separated by
1661 commas and surrounded by braces. The @var{n}th number is 1 if
1662 register @var{n} is fixed, 0 otherwise.
1663
1664 The table initialized from this macro, and the table initialized by
1665 the following one, may be overridden at run time either automatically,
1666 by the actions of the macro @code{CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}, or by
1667 the user with the command options @option{-ffixed-@var{reg}},
1668 @option{-fcall-used-@var{reg}} and @option{-fcall-saved-@var{reg}}.
1669 @end defmac
1670
1671 @defmac CALL_USED_REGISTERS
1672 @cindex call-used register
1673 @cindex call-clobbered register
1674 @cindex call-saved register
1675 Like @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} but has 1 for each register that is
1676 clobbered (in general) by function calls as well as for fixed
1677 registers. This macro therefore identifies the registers that are not
1678 available for general allocation of values that must live across
1679 function calls.
1680
1681 If a register has 0 in @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}, the compiler
1682 automatically saves it on function entry and restores it on function
1683 exit, if the register is used within the function.
1684 @end defmac
1685
1686 @defmac CALL_REALLY_USED_REGISTERS
1687 @cindex call-used register
1688 @cindex call-clobbered register
1689 @cindex call-saved register
1690 Like @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} except this macro doesn't require
1691 that the entire set of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS} be included.
1692 (@code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS} must be a superset of @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}).
1693 This macro is optional. If not specified, it defaults to the value
1694 of @code{CALL_USED_REGISTERS}.
1695 @end defmac
1696
1697 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALL_PART_CLOBBERED (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1698 @cindex call-used register
1699 @cindex call-clobbered register
1700 @cindex call-saved register
1701 A C expression that is nonzero if it is not permissible to store a
1702 value of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} across a
1703 call without some part of it being clobbered. For most machines this
1704 macro need not be defined. It is only required for machines that do not
1705 preserve the entire contents of a register across a call.
1706 @end defmac
1707
1708 @findex fixed_regs
1709 @findex call_used_regs
1710 @findex global_regs
1711 @findex reg_names
1712 @findex reg_class_contents
1713 @hook TARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE
1714
1715 @defmac INCOMING_REGNO (@var{out})
1716 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1717 expression returns the register number as seen by the called function
1718 corresponding to the register number @var{out} as seen by the calling
1719 function. Return @var{out} if register number @var{out} is not an
1720 outbound register.
1721 @end defmac
1722
1723 @defmac OUTGOING_REGNO (@var{in})
1724 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1725 expression returns the register number as seen by the calling function
1726 corresponding to the register number @var{in} as seen by the called
1727 function. Return @var{in} if register number @var{in} is not an inbound
1728 register.
1729 @end defmac
1730
1731 @defmac LOCAL_REGNO (@var{regno})
1732 Define this macro if the target machine has register windows. This C
1733 expression returns true if the register is call-saved but is in the
1734 register window. Unlike most call-saved registers, such registers
1735 need not be explicitly restored on function exit or during non-local
1736 gotos.
1737 @end defmac
1738
1739 @defmac PC_REGNUM
1740 If the program counter has a register number, define this as that
1741 register number. Otherwise, do not define it.
1742 @end defmac
1743
1744 @node Allocation Order
1745 @subsection Order of Allocation of Registers
1746 @cindex order of register allocation
1747 @cindex register allocation order
1748
1749 @c prevent bad page break with this line
1750 Registers are allocated in order.
1751
1752 @defmac REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1753 If defined, an initializer for a vector of integers, containing the
1754 numbers of hard registers in the order in which GCC should prefer
1755 to use them (from most preferred to least).
1756
1757 If this macro is not defined, registers are used lowest numbered first
1758 (all else being equal).
1759
1760 One use of this macro is on machines where the highest numbered
1761 registers must always be saved and the save-multiple-registers
1762 instruction supports only sequences of consecutive registers. On such
1763 machines, define @code{REG_ALLOC_ORDER} to be an initializer that lists
1764 the highest numbered allocable register first.
1765 @end defmac
1766
1767 @defmac ADJUST_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1768 A C statement (sans semicolon) to choose the order in which to allocate
1769 hard registers for pseudo-registers local to a basic block.
1770
1771 Store the desired register order in the array @code{reg_alloc_order}.
1772 Element 0 should be the register to allocate first; element 1, the next
1773 register; and so on.
1774
1775 The macro body should not assume anything about the contents of
1776 @code{reg_alloc_order} before execution of the macro.
1777
1778 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1779 @end defmac
1780
1781 @defmac HONOR_REG_ALLOC_ORDER
1782 Normally, IRA tries to estimate the costs for saving a register in the
1783 prologue and restoring it in the epilogue. This discourages it from
1784 using call-saved registers. If a machine wants to ensure that IRA
1785 allocates registers in the order given by REG_ALLOC_ORDER even if some
1786 call-saved registers appear earlier than call-used ones, then define this
1787 macro as a C expression to nonzero. Default is 0.
1788 @end defmac
1789
1790 @defmac IRA_HARD_REGNO_ADD_COST_MULTIPLIER (@var{regno})
1791 In some case register allocation order is not enough for the
1792 Integrated Register Allocator (@acronym{IRA}) to generate a good code.
1793 If this macro is defined, it should return a floating point value
1794 based on @var{regno}. The cost of using @var{regno} for a pseudo will
1795 be increased by approximately the pseudo's usage frequency times the
1796 value returned by this macro. Not defining this macro is equivalent
1797 to having it always return @code{0.0}.
1798
1799 On most machines, it is not necessary to define this macro.
1800 @end defmac
1801
1802 @node Values in Registers
1803 @subsection How Values Fit in Registers
1804
1805 This section discusses the macros that describe which kinds of values
1806 (specifically, which machine modes) each register can hold, and how many
1807 consecutive registers are needed for a given mode.
1808
1809 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1810 A C expression for the number of consecutive hard registers, starting
1811 at register number @var{regno}, required to hold a value of mode
1812 @var{mode}. This macro must never return zero, even if a register
1813 cannot hold the requested mode - indicate that with HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK
1814 and/or CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS instead.
1815
1816 On a machine where all registers are exactly one word, a suitable
1817 definition of this macro is
1818
1819 @smallexample
1820 #define HARD_REGNO_NREGS(REGNO, MODE) \
1821 ((GET_MODE_SIZE (MODE) + UNITS_PER_WORD - 1) \
1822 / UNITS_PER_WORD)
1823 @end smallexample
1824 @end defmac
1825
1826 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1827 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode @var{mode}, stored
1828 in memory, ends with padding that causes it to take up more space than
1829 in registers starting at register number @var{regno} (as determined by
1830 multiplying GCC's notion of the size of the register when containing
1831 this mode by the number of registers returned by
1832 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}). By default this is zero.
1833
1834 For example, if a floating-point value is stored in three 32-bit
1835 registers but takes up 128 bits in memory, then this would be
1836 nonzero.
1837
1838 This macros only needs to be defined if there are cases where
1839 @code{subreg_get_info}
1840 would otherwise wrongly determine that a @code{subreg} can be
1841 represented by an offset to the register number, when in fact such a
1842 @code{subreg} would contain some of the padding not stored in
1843 registers and so not be representable.
1844 @end defmac
1845
1846 @defmac HARD_REGNO_NREGS_WITH_PADDING (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1847 For values of @var{regno} and @var{mode} for which
1848 @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS_HAS_PADDING} returns nonzero, a C expression
1849 returning the greater number of registers required to hold the value
1850 including any padding. In the example above, the value would be four.
1851 @end defmac
1852
1853 @defmac REGMODE_NATURAL_SIZE (@var{mode})
1854 Define this macro if the natural size of registers that hold values
1855 of mode @var{mode} is not the word size. It is a C expression that
1856 should give the natural size in bytes for the specified mode. It is
1857 used by the register allocator to try to optimize its results. This
1858 happens for example on SPARC 64-bit where the natural size of
1859 floating-point registers is still 32-bit.
1860 @end defmac
1861
1862 @defmac HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{regno}, @var{mode})
1863 A C expression that is nonzero if it is permissible to store a value
1864 of mode @var{mode} in hard register number @var{regno} (or in several
1865 registers starting with that one). For a machine where all registers
1866 are equivalent, a suitable definition is
1867
1868 @smallexample
1869 #define HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK(REGNO, MODE) 1
1870 @end smallexample
1871
1872 You need not include code to check for the numbers of fixed registers,
1873 because the allocation mechanism considers them to be always occupied.
1874
1875 @cindex register pairs
1876 On some machines, double-precision values must be kept in even/odd
1877 register pairs. You can implement that by defining this macro to reject
1878 odd register numbers for such modes.
1879
1880 The minimum requirement for a mode to be OK in a register is that the
1881 @samp{mov@var{mode}} instruction pattern support moves between the
1882 register and other hard register in the same class and that moving a
1883 value into the register and back out not alter it.
1884
1885 Since the same instruction used to move @code{word_mode} will work for
1886 all narrower integer modes, it is not necessary on any machine for
1887 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} to distinguish between these modes, provided
1888 you define patterns @samp{movhi}, etc., to take advantage of this. This
1889 is useful because of the interaction between @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}
1890 and @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P}; it is very desirable for all integer modes
1891 to be tieable.
1892
1893 Many machines have special registers for floating point arithmetic.
1894 Often people assume that floating point machine modes are allowed only
1895 in floating point registers. This is not true. Any registers that
1896 can hold integers can safely @emph{hold} a floating point machine
1897 mode, whether or not floating arithmetic can be done on it in those
1898 registers. Integer move instructions can be used to move the values.
1899
1900 On some machines, though, the converse is true: fixed-point machine
1901 modes may not go in floating registers. This is true if the floating
1902 registers normalize any value stored in them, because storing a
1903 non-floating value there would garble it. In this case,
1904 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK} should reject fixed-point machine modes in
1905 floating registers. But if the floating registers do not automatically
1906 normalize, if you can store any bit pattern in one and retrieve it
1907 unchanged without a trap, then any machine mode may go in a floating
1908 register, so you can define this macro to say so.
1909
1910 The primary significance of special floating registers is rather that
1911 they are the registers acceptable in floating point arithmetic
1912 instructions. However, this is of no concern to
1913 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}. You handle it by writing the proper
1914 constraints for those instructions.
1915
1916 On some machines, the floating registers are especially slow to access,
1917 so that it is better to store a value in a stack frame than in such a
1918 register if floating point arithmetic is not being done. As long as the
1919 floating registers are not in class @code{GENERAL_REGS}, they will not
1920 be used unless some pattern's constraint asks for one.
1921 @end defmac
1922
1923 @defmac HARD_REGNO_RENAME_OK (@var{from}, @var{to})
1924 A C expression that is nonzero if it is OK to rename a hard register
1925 @var{from} to another hard register @var{to}.
1926
1927 One common use of this macro is to prevent renaming of a register to
1928 another register that is not saved by a prologue in an interrupt
1929 handler.
1930
1931 The default is always nonzero.
1932 @end defmac
1933
1934 @defmac MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})
1935 A C expression that is nonzero if a value of mode
1936 @var{mode1} is accessible in mode @var{mode2} without copying.
1937
1938 If @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode1})} and
1939 @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK (@var{r}, @var{mode2})} are always the same for
1940 any @var{r}, then @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P (@var{mode1}, @var{mode2})}
1941 should be nonzero. If they differ for any @var{r}, you should define
1942 this macro to return zero unless some other mechanism ensures the
1943 accessibility of the value in a narrower mode.
1944
1945 You should define this macro to return nonzero in as many cases as
1946 possible since doing so will allow GCC to perform better register
1947 allocation.
1948 @end defmac
1949
1950 @hook TARGET_HARD_REGNO_SCRATCH_OK
1951
1952 @defmac AVOID_CCMODE_COPIES
1953 Define this macro if the compiler should avoid copies to/from @code{CCmode}
1954 registers. You should only define this macro if support for copying to/from
1955 @code{CCmode} is incomplete.
1956 @end defmac
1957
1958 @node Leaf Functions
1959 @subsection Handling Leaf Functions
1960
1961 @cindex leaf functions
1962 @cindex functions, leaf
1963 On some machines, a leaf function (i.e., one which makes no calls) can run
1964 more efficiently if it does not make its own register window. Often this
1965 means it is required to receive its arguments in the registers where they
1966 are passed by the caller, instead of the registers where they would
1967 normally arrive.
1968
1969 The special treatment for leaf functions generally applies only when
1970 other conditions are met; for example, often they may use only those
1971 registers for its own variables and temporaries. We use the term ``leaf
1972 function'' to mean a function that is suitable for this special
1973 handling, so that functions with no calls are not necessarily ``leaf
1974 functions''.
1975
1976 GCC assigns register numbers before it knows whether the function is
1977 suitable for leaf function treatment. So it needs to renumber the
1978 registers in order to output a leaf function. The following macros
1979 accomplish this.
1980
1981 @defmac LEAF_REGISTERS
1982 Name of a char vector, indexed by hard register number, which
1983 contains 1 for a register that is allowable in a candidate for leaf
1984 function treatment.
1985
1986 If leaf function treatment involves renumbering the registers, then the
1987 registers marked here should be the ones before renumbering---those that
1988 GCC would ordinarily allocate. The registers which will actually be
1989 used in the assembler code, after renumbering, should not be marked with 1
1990 in this vector.
1991
1992 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize
1993 the treatment of leaf functions.
1994 @end defmac
1995
1996 @defmac LEAF_REG_REMAP (@var{regno})
1997 A C expression whose value is the register number to which @var{regno}
1998 should be renumbered, when a function is treated as a leaf function.
1999
2000 If @var{regno} is a register number which should not appear in a leaf
2001 function before renumbering, then the expression should yield @minus{}1, which
2002 will cause the compiler to abort.
2003
2004 Define this macro only if the target machine offers a way to optimize the
2005 treatment of leaf functions, and registers need to be renumbered to do
2006 this.
2007 @end defmac
2008
2009 @findex current_function_is_leaf
2010 @findex current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs
2011 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} and
2012 @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE} must usually treat leaf functions
2013 specially. They can test the C variable @code{current_function_is_leaf}
2014 which is nonzero for leaf functions. @code{current_function_is_leaf} is
2015 set prior to local register allocation and is valid for the remaining
2016 compiler passes. They can also test the C variable
2017 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} which is nonzero for leaf
2018 functions which only use leaf registers.
2019 @code{current_function_uses_only_leaf_regs} is valid after all passes
2020 that modify the instructions have been run and is only useful if
2021 @code{LEAF_REGISTERS} is defined.
2022 @c changed this to fix overfull. ALSO: why the "it" at the beginning
2023 @c of the next paragraph?! --mew 2feb93
2024
2025 @node Stack Registers
2026 @subsection Registers That Form a Stack
2027
2028 There are special features to handle computers where some of the
2029 ``registers'' form a stack. Stack registers are normally written by
2030 pushing onto the stack, and are numbered relative to the top of the
2031 stack.
2032
2033 Currently, GCC can only handle one group of stack-like registers, and
2034 they must be consecutively numbered. Furthermore, the existing
2035 support for stack-like registers is specific to the 80387 floating
2036 point coprocessor. If you have a new architecture that uses
2037 stack-like registers, you will need to do substantial work on
2038 @file{reg-stack.c} and write your machine description to cooperate
2039 with it, as well as defining these macros.
2040
2041 @defmac STACK_REGS
2042 Define this if the machine has any stack-like registers.
2043 @end defmac
2044
2045 @defmac STACK_REG_COVER_CLASS
2046 This is a cover class containing the stack registers. Define this if
2047 the machine has any stack-like registers.
2048 @end defmac
2049
2050 @defmac FIRST_STACK_REG
2051 The number of the first stack-like register. This one is the top
2052 of the stack.
2053 @end defmac
2054
2055 @defmac LAST_STACK_REG
2056 The number of the last stack-like register. This one is the bottom of
2057 the stack.
2058 @end defmac
2059
2060 @node Register Classes
2061 @section Register Classes
2062 @cindex register class definitions
2063 @cindex class definitions, register
2064
2065 On many machines, the numbered registers are not all equivalent.
2066 For example, certain registers may not be allowed for indexed addressing;
2067 certain registers may not be allowed in some instructions. These machine
2068 restrictions are described to the compiler using @dfn{register classes}.
2069
2070 You define a number of register classes, giving each one a name and saying
2071 which of the registers belong to it. Then you can specify register classes
2072 that are allowed as operands to particular instruction patterns.
2073
2074 @findex ALL_REGS
2075 @findex NO_REGS
2076 In general, each register will belong to several classes. In fact, one
2077 class must be named @code{ALL_REGS} and contain all the registers. Another
2078 class must be named @code{NO_REGS} and contain no registers. Often the
2079 union of two classes will be another class; however, this is not required.
2080
2081 @findex GENERAL_REGS
2082 One of the classes must be named @code{GENERAL_REGS}. There is nothing
2083 terribly special about the name, but the operand constraint letters
2084 @samp{r} and @samp{g} specify this class. If @code{GENERAL_REGS} is
2085 the same as @code{ALL_REGS}, just define it as a macro which expands
2086 to @code{ALL_REGS}.
2087
2088 Order the classes so that if class @var{x} is contained in class @var{y}
2089 then @var{x} has a lower class number than @var{y}.
2090
2091 The way classes other than @code{GENERAL_REGS} are specified in operand
2092 constraints is through machine-dependent operand constraint letters.
2093 You can define such letters to correspond to various classes, then use
2094 them in operand constraints.
2095
2096 You must define the narrowest register classes for allocatable
2097 registers, so that each class either has no subclasses, or that for
2098 some mode, the move cost between registers within the class is
2099 cheaper than moving a register in the class to or from memory
2100 (@pxref{Costs}).
2101
2102 You should define a class for the union of two classes whenever some
2103 instruction allows both classes. For example, if an instruction allows
2104 either a floating point (coprocessor) register or a general register for a
2105 certain operand, you should define a class @code{FLOAT_OR_GENERAL_REGS}
2106 which includes both of them. Otherwise you will get suboptimal code,
2107 or even internal compiler errors when reload cannot find a register in the
2108 class computed via @code{reg_class_subunion}.
2109
2110 You must also specify certain redundant information about the register
2111 classes: for each class, which classes contain it and which ones are
2112 contained in it; for each pair of classes, the largest class contained
2113 in their union.
2114
2115 When a value occupying several consecutive registers is expected in a
2116 certain class, all the registers used must belong to that class.
2117 Therefore, register classes cannot be used to enforce a requirement for
2118 a register pair to start with an even-numbered register. The way to
2119 specify this requirement is with @code{HARD_REGNO_MODE_OK}.
2120
2121 Register classes used for input-operands of bitwise-and or shift
2122 instructions have a special requirement: each such class must have, for
2123 each fixed-point machine mode, a subclass whose registers can transfer that
2124 mode to or from memory. For example, on some machines, the operations for
2125 single-byte values (@code{QImode}) are limited to certain registers. When
2126 this is so, each register class that is used in a bitwise-and or shift
2127 instruction must have a subclass consisting of registers from which
2128 single-byte values can be loaded or stored. This is so that
2129 @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} can always have a possible value to return.
2130
2131 @deftp {Data type} {enum reg_class}
2132 An enumerated type that must be defined with all the register class names
2133 as enumerated values. @code{NO_REGS} must be first. @code{ALL_REGS}
2134 must be the last register class, followed by one more enumerated value,
2135 @code{LIM_REG_CLASSES}, which is not a register class but rather
2136 tells how many classes there are.
2137
2138 Each register class has a number, which is the value of casting
2139 the class name to type @code{int}. The number serves as an index
2140 in many of the tables described below.
2141 @end deftp
2142
2143 @defmac N_REG_CLASSES
2144 The number of distinct register classes, defined as follows:
2145
2146 @smallexample
2147 #define N_REG_CLASSES (int) LIM_REG_CLASSES
2148 @end smallexample
2149 @end defmac
2150
2151 @defmac REG_CLASS_NAMES
2152 An initializer containing the names of the register classes as C string
2153 constants. These names are used in writing some of the debugging dumps.
2154 @end defmac
2155
2156 @defmac REG_CLASS_CONTENTS
2157 An initializer containing the contents of the register classes, as integers
2158 which are bit masks. The @var{n}th integer specifies the contents of class
2159 @var{n}. The way the integer @var{mask} is interpreted is that
2160 register @var{r} is in the class if @code{@var{mask} & (1 << @var{r})} is 1.
2161
2162 When the machine has more than 32 registers, an integer does not suffice.
2163 Then the integers are replaced by sub-initializers, braced groupings containing
2164 several integers. Each sub-initializer must be suitable as an initializer
2165 for the type @code{HARD_REG_SET} which is defined in @file{hard-reg-set.h}.
2166 In this situation, the first integer in each sub-initializer corresponds to
2167 registers 0 through 31, the second integer to registers 32 through 63, and
2168 so on.
2169 @end defmac
2170
2171 @defmac REGNO_REG_CLASS (@var{regno})
2172 A C expression whose value is a register class containing hard register
2173 @var{regno}. In general there is more than one such class; choose a class
2174 which is @dfn{minimal}, meaning that no smaller class also contains the
2175 register.
2176 @end defmac
2177
2178 @defmac BASE_REG_CLASS
2179 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2180 base register must belong. A base register is one used in an address
2181 which is the register value plus a displacement.
2182 @end defmac
2183
2184 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2185 This is a variation of the @code{BASE_REG_CLASS} macro which allows
2186 the selection of a base register in a mode dependent manner. If
2187 @var{mode} is VOIDmode then it should return the same value as
2188 @code{BASE_REG_CLASS}.
2189 @end defmac
2190
2191 @defmac MODE_BASE_REG_REG_CLASS (@var{mode})
2192 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2193 base register must belong in order to be used in a base plus index
2194 register address. You should define this macro if base plus index
2195 addresses have different requirements than other base register uses.
2196 @end defmac
2197
2198 @defmac MODE_CODE_BASE_REG_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2199 A C expression whose value is the register class to which a valid
2200 base register for a memory reference in mode @var{mode} to address
2201 space @var{address_space} must belong. @var{outer_code} and @var{index_code}
2202 define the context in which the base register occurs. @var{outer_code} is
2203 the code of the immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} for the top level
2204 of an address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2205 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the corresponding
2206 index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS}; @code{SCRATCH} otherwise.
2207 @end defmac
2208
2209 @defmac INDEX_REG_CLASS
2210 A macro whose definition is the name of the class to which a valid
2211 index register must belong. An index register is one used in an
2212 address where its value is either multiplied by a scale factor or
2213 added to another register (as well as added to a displacement).
2214 @end defmac
2215
2216 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num})
2217 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2218 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses.
2219 @end defmac
2220
2221 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2222 A C expression that is just like @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except that
2223 that expression may examine the mode of the memory reference in
2224 @var{mode}. You should define this macro if the mode of the memory
2225 reference affects whether a register may be used as a base register. If
2226 you define this macro, the compiler will use it instead of
2227 @code{REGNO_OK_FOR_BASE_P}. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for
2228 addresses that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an
2229 @code{address_operand}.
2230 @end defmac
2231
2232 @defmac REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_REG_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode})
2233 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is suitable for
2234 use as a base register in base plus index operand addresses, accessing
2235 memory in mode @var{mode}. It may be either a suitable hard register or a
2236 pseudo register that has been allocated such a hard register. You should
2237 define this macro if base plus index addresses have different requirements
2238 than other base register uses.
2239
2240 Use of this macro is deprecated; please use the more general
2241 @code{REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}.
2242 @end defmac
2243
2244 @defmac REGNO_MODE_CODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P (@var{num}, @var{mode}, @var{address_space}, @var{outer_code}, @var{index_code})
2245 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2246 suitable for use as a base register in operand addresses, accessing
2247 memory in mode @var{mode} in address space @var{address_space}.
2248 This is similar to @code{REGNO_MODE_OK_FOR_BASE_P}, except
2249 that that expression may examine the context in which the register
2250 appears in the memory reference. @var{outer_code} is the code of the
2251 immediately enclosing expression (@code{MEM} if at the top level of the
2252 address, @code{ADDRESS} for something that occurs in an
2253 @code{address_operand}). @var{index_code} is the code of the
2254 corresponding index expression if @var{outer_code} is @code{PLUS};
2255 @code{SCRATCH} otherwise. The mode may be @code{VOIDmode} for addresses
2256 that appear outside a @code{MEM}, i.e., as an @code{address_operand}.
2257 @end defmac
2258
2259 @defmac REGNO_OK_FOR_INDEX_P (@var{num})
2260 A C expression which is nonzero if register number @var{num} is
2261 suitable for use as an index register in operand addresses. It may be
2262 either a suitable hard register or a pseudo register that has been
2263 allocated such a hard register.
2264
2265 The difference between an index register and a base register is that
2266 the index register may be scaled. If an address involves the sum of
2267 two registers, neither one of them scaled, then either one may be
2268 labeled the ``base'' and the other the ``index''; but whichever
2269 labeling is used must fit the machine's constraints of which registers
2270 may serve in each capacity. The compiler will try both labelings,
2271 looking for one that is valid, and will reload one or both registers
2272 only if neither labeling works.
2273 @end defmac
2274
2275 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RENAME_CLASS
2276
2277 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS
2278
2279 @defmac PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{x}, @var{class})
2280 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2281 to use when it is necessary to copy value @var{x} into a register in class
2282 @var{class}. The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps
2283 another, smaller class. On many machines, the following definition is
2284 safe:
2285
2286 @smallexample
2287 #define PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS(X,CLASS) CLASS
2288 @end smallexample
2289
2290 Sometimes returning a more restrictive class makes better code. For
2291 example, on the 68000, when @var{x} is an integer constant that is in range
2292 for a @samp{moveq} instruction, the value of this macro is always
2293 @code{DATA_REGS} as long as @var{class} includes the data registers.
2294 Requiring a data register guarantees that a @samp{moveq} will be used.
2295
2296 One case where @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} must not return
2297 @var{class} is if @var{x} is a legitimate constant which cannot be
2298 loaded into some register class. By returning @code{NO_REGS} you can
2299 force @var{x} into a memory location. For example, rs6000 can load
2300 immediate values into general-purpose registers, but does not have an
2301 instruction for loading an immediate value into a floating-point
2302 register, so @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS} returns @code{NO_REGS} when
2303 @var{x} is a floating-point constant. If the constant can't be loaded
2304 into any kind of register, code generation will be better if
2305 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P} makes the constant illegitimate instead
2306 of using @code{TARGET_PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}.
2307
2308 If an insn has pseudos in it after register allocation, reload will go
2309 through the alternatives and call repeatedly @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}
2310 to find the best one. Returning @code{NO_REGS}, in this case, makes
2311 reload add a @code{!} in front of the constraint: the x86 back-end uses
2312 this feature to discourage usage of 387 registers when math is done in
2313 the SSE registers (and vice versa).
2314 @end defmac
2315
2316 @hook TARGET_PREFERRED_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS
2317
2318 @defmac LIMIT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{mode}, @var{class})
2319 A C expression that places additional restrictions on the register class
2320 to use when it is necessary to be able to hold a value of mode
2321 @var{mode} in a reload register for which class @var{class} would
2322 ordinarily be used.
2323
2324 Unlike @code{PREFERRED_RELOAD_CLASS}, this macro should be used when
2325 there are certain modes that simply can't go in certain reload classes.
2326
2327 The value is a register class; perhaps @var{class}, or perhaps another,
2328 smaller class.
2329
2330 Don't define this macro unless the target machine has limitations which
2331 require the macro to do something nontrivial.
2332 @end defmac
2333
2334 @hook TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD
2335
2336 @defmac SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2337 @defmacx SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2338 @defmacx SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS (@var{class}, @var{mode}, @var{x})
2339 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
2340 @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD} instead.
2341
2342 These are obsolete macros, replaced by the @code{TARGET_SECONDARY_RELOAD}
2343 target hook. Older ports still define these macros to indicate to the
2344 reload phase that it may
2345 need to allocate at least one register for a reload in addition to the
2346 register to contain the data. Specifically, if copying @var{x} to a
2347 register @var{class} in @var{mode} requires an intermediate register,
2348 you were supposed to define @code{SECONDARY_INPUT_RELOAD_CLASS} to return the
2349 largest register class all of whose registers can be used as
2350 intermediate registers or scratch registers.
2351
2352 If copying a register @var{class} in @var{mode} to @var{x} requires an
2353 intermediate or scratch register, @code{SECONDARY_OUTPUT_RELOAD_CLASS}
2354 was supposed to be defined be defined to return the largest register
2355 class required. If the
2356 requirements for input and output reloads were the same, the macro
2357 @code{SECONDARY_RELOAD_CLASS} should have been used instead of defining both
2358 macros identically.
2359
2360 The values returned by these macros are often @code{GENERAL_REGS}.
2361 Return @code{NO_REGS} if no spare register is needed; i.e., if @var{x}
2362 can be directly copied to or from a register of @var{class} in
2363 @var{mode} without requiring a scratch register. Do not define this
2364 macro if it would always return @code{NO_REGS}.
2365
2366 If a scratch register is required (either with or without an
2367 intermediate register), you were supposed to define patterns for
2368 @samp{reload_in@var{m}} or @samp{reload_out@var{m}}, as required
2369 (@pxref{Standard Names}. These patterns, which were normally
2370 implemented with a @code{define_expand}, should be similar to the
2371 @samp{mov@var{m}} patterns, except that operand 2 is the scratch
2372 register.
2373
2374 These patterns need constraints for the reload register and scratch
2375 register that
2376 contain a single register class. If the original reload register (whose
2377 class is @var{class}) can meet the constraint given in the pattern, the
2378 value returned by these macros is used for the class of the scratch
2379 register. Otherwise, two additional reload registers are required.
2380 Their classes are obtained from the constraints in the insn pattern.
2381
2382 @var{x} might be a pseudo-register or a @code{subreg} of a
2383 pseudo-register, which could either be in a hard register or in memory.
2384 Use @code{true_regnum} to find out; it will return @minus{}1 if the pseudo is
2385 in memory and the hard register number if it is in a register.
2386
2387 These macros should not be used in the case where a particular class of
2388 registers can only be copied to memory and not to another class of
2389 registers. In that case, secondary reload registers are not needed and
2390 would not be helpful. Instead, a stack location must be used to perform
2391 the copy and the @code{mov@var{m}} pattern should use memory as an
2392 intermediate storage. This case often occurs between floating-point and
2393 general registers.
2394 @end defmac
2395
2396 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED (@var{class1}, @var{class2}, @var{m})
2397 Certain machines have the property that some registers cannot be copied
2398 to some other registers without using memory. Define this macro on
2399 those machines to be a C expression that is nonzero if objects of mode
2400 @var{m} in registers of @var{class1} can only be copied to registers of
2401 class @var{class2} by storing a register of @var{class1} into memory
2402 and loading that memory location into a register of @var{class2}.
2403
2404 Do not define this macro if its value would always be zero.
2405 @end defmac
2406
2407 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_RTX (@var{mode})
2408 Normally when @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} is defined, the compiler
2409 allocates a stack slot for a memory location needed for register copies.
2410 If this macro is defined, the compiler instead uses the memory location
2411 defined by this macro.
2412
2413 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2414 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED}.
2415 @end defmac
2416
2417 @defmac SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED_MODE (@var{mode})
2418 When the compiler needs a secondary memory location to copy between two
2419 registers of mode @var{mode}, it normally allocates sufficient memory to
2420 hold a quantity of @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits and performs the store and
2421 load operations in a mode that many bits wide and whose class is the
2422 same as that of @var{mode}.
2423
2424 This is right thing to do on most machines because it ensures that all
2425 bits of the register are copied and prevents accesses to the registers
2426 in a narrower mode, which some machines prohibit for floating-point
2427 registers.
2428
2429 However, this default behavior is not correct on some machines, such as
2430 the DEC Alpha, that store short integers in floating-point registers
2431 differently than in integer registers. On those machines, the default
2432 widening will not work correctly and you must define this macro to
2433 suppress that widening in some cases. See the file @file{alpha.h} for
2434 details.
2435
2436 Do not define this macro if you do not define
2437 @code{SECONDARY_MEMORY_NEEDED} or if widening @var{mode} to a mode that
2438 is @code{BITS_PER_WORD} bits wide is correct for your machine.
2439 @end defmac
2440
2441 @hook TARGET_CLASS_LIKELY_SPILLED_P
2442
2443 @hook TARGET_CLASS_MAX_NREGS
2444
2445 @defmac CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})
2446 A C expression for the maximum number of consecutive registers
2447 of class @var{class} needed to hold a value of mode @var{mode}.
2448
2449 This is closely related to the macro @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS}. In fact,
2450 the value of the macro @code{CLASS_MAX_NREGS (@var{class}, @var{mode})}
2451 should be the maximum value of @code{HARD_REGNO_NREGS (@var{regno},
2452 @var{mode})} for all @var{regno} values in the class @var{class}.
2453
2454 This macro helps control the handling of multiple-word values
2455 in the reload pass.
2456 @end defmac
2457
2458 @defmac CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS (@var{from}, @var{to}, @var{class})
2459 If defined, a C expression that returns nonzero for a @var{class} for which
2460 a change from mode @var{from} to mode @var{to} is invalid.
2461
2462 For the example, loading 32-bit integer or floating-point objects into
2463 floating-point registers on the Alpha extends them to 64 bits.
2464 Therefore loading a 64-bit object and then storing it as a 32-bit object
2465 does not store the low-order 32 bits, as would be the case for a normal
2466 register. Therefore, @file{alpha.h} defines @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS}
2467 as below:
2468
2469 @smallexample
2470 #define CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS(FROM, TO, CLASS) \
2471 (GET_MODE_SIZE (FROM) != GET_MODE_SIZE (TO) \
2472 ? reg_classes_intersect_p (FLOAT_REGS, (CLASS)) : 0)
2473 @end smallexample
2474 @end defmac
2475
2476 @hook TARGET_LRA_P
2477
2478 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_PRIORITY
2479
2480 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_USAGE_LEVELING_P
2481
2482 @hook TARGET_DIFFERENT_ADDR_DISPLACEMENT_P
2483
2484 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_SUBSTITUTE_MEM_EQUIV_P
2485
2486 @hook TARGET_SPILL_CLASS
2487
2488 @hook TARGET_CSTORE_MODE
2489
2490 @node Stack and Calling
2491 @section Stack Layout and Calling Conventions
2492 @cindex calling conventions
2493
2494 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2495 This describes the stack layout and calling conventions.
2496
2497 @menu
2498 * Frame Layout::
2499 * Exception Handling::
2500 * Stack Checking::
2501 * Frame Registers::
2502 * Elimination::
2503 * Stack Arguments::
2504 * Register Arguments::
2505 * Scalar Return::
2506 * Aggregate Return::
2507 * Caller Saves::
2508 * Function Entry::
2509 * Profiling::
2510 * Tail Calls::
2511 * Stack Smashing Protection::
2512 * Miscellaneous Register Hooks::
2513 @end menu
2514
2515 @node Frame Layout
2516 @subsection Basic Stack Layout
2517 @cindex stack frame layout
2518 @cindex frame layout
2519
2520 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2521 Here is the basic stack layout.
2522
2523 @defmac STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2524 Define this macro if pushing a word onto the stack moves the stack
2525 pointer to a smaller address.
2526
2527 When we say, ``define this macro if @dots{}'', it means that the
2528 compiler checks this macro only with @code{#ifdef} so the precise
2529 definition used does not matter.
2530 @end defmac
2531
2532 @defmac STACK_PUSH_CODE
2533 This macro defines the operation used when something is pushed
2534 on the stack. In RTL, a push operation will be
2535 @code{(set (mem (STACK_PUSH_CODE (reg sp))) @dots{})}
2536
2537 The choices are @code{PRE_DEC}, @code{POST_DEC}, @code{PRE_INC},
2538 and @code{POST_INC}. Which of these is correct depends on
2539 the stack direction and on whether the stack pointer points
2540 to the last item on the stack or whether it points to the
2541 space for the next item on the stack.
2542
2543 The default is @code{PRE_DEC} when @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is
2544 defined, which is almost always right, and @code{PRE_INC} otherwise,
2545 which is often wrong.
2546 @end defmac
2547
2548 @defmac FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD
2549 Define this macro to nonzero value if the addresses of local variable slots
2550 are at negative offsets from the frame pointer.
2551 @end defmac
2552
2553 @defmac ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD
2554 Define this macro if successive arguments to a function occupy decreasing
2555 addresses on the stack.
2556 @end defmac
2557
2558 @defmac STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET
2559 Offset from the frame pointer to the first local variable slot to be allocated.
2560
2561 If @code{FRAME_GROWS_DOWNWARD}, find the next slot's offset by
2562 subtracting the first slot's length from @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2563 Otherwise, it is found by adding the length of the first slot to the
2564 value @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET}.
2565 @c i'm not sure if the above is still correct.. had to change it to get
2566 @c rid of an overfull. --mew 2feb93
2567 @end defmac
2568
2569 @defmac STACK_ALIGNMENT_NEEDED
2570 Define to zero to disable final alignment of the stack during reload.
2571 The nonzero default for this macro is suitable for most ports.
2572
2573 On ports where @code{STARTING_FRAME_OFFSET} is nonzero or where there
2574 is a register save block following the local block that doesn't require
2575 alignment to @code{STACK_BOUNDARY}, it may be beneficial to disable
2576 stack alignment and do it in the backend.
2577 @end defmac
2578
2579 @defmac STACK_POINTER_OFFSET
2580 Offset from the stack pointer register to the first location at which
2581 outgoing arguments are placed. If not specified, the default value of
2582 zero is used. This is the proper value for most machines.
2583
2584 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2585 the first location at which outgoing arguments are placed.
2586 @end defmac
2587
2588 @defmac FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2589 Offset from the argument pointer register to the first argument's
2590 address. On some machines it may depend on the data type of the
2591 function.
2592
2593 If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, this is the offset to the location above
2594 the first argument's address.
2595 @end defmac
2596
2597 @defmac STACK_DYNAMIC_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2598 Offset from the stack pointer register to an item dynamically allocated
2599 on the stack, e.g., by @code{alloca}.
2600
2601 The default value for this macro is @code{STACK_POINTER_OFFSET} plus the
2602 length of the outgoing arguments. The default is correct for most
2603 machines. See @file{function.c} for details.
2604 @end defmac
2605
2606 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_ADDRESS_RTX
2607 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address of the initial
2608 stack frame. This address is passed to @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and
2609 @code{DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS}. If you don't define this macro, a reasonable
2610 default value will be used. Define this macro in order to make frame pointer
2611 elimination work in the presence of @code{__builtin_frame_address (count)} and
2612 @code{__builtin_return_address (count)} for @code{count} not equal to zero.
2613 @end defmac
2614
2615 @defmac DYNAMIC_CHAIN_ADDRESS (@var{frameaddr})
2616 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the address in a stack
2617 frame where the pointer to the caller's frame is stored. Assume that
2618 @var{frameaddr} is an RTL expression for the address of the stack frame
2619 itself.
2620
2621 If you don't define this macro, the default is to return the value
2622 of @var{frameaddr}---that is, the stack frame address is also the
2623 address of the stack word that points to the previous frame.
2624 @end defmac
2625
2626 @defmac SETUP_FRAME_ADDRESSES
2627 If defined, a C expression that produces the machine-specific code to
2628 setup the stack so that arbitrary frames can be accessed. For example,
2629 on the SPARC, we must flush all of the register windows to the stack
2630 before we can access arbitrary stack frames. You will seldom need to
2631 define this macro.
2632 @end defmac
2633
2634 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_SETJMP_FRAME_VALUE
2635
2636 @defmac FRAME_ADDR_RTX (@var{frameaddr})
2637 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the frame
2638 address for the current frame. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer
2639 of the current frame. This is used for __builtin_frame_address.
2640 You need only define this macro if the frame address is not the same
2641 as the frame pointer. Most machines do not need to define it.
2642 @end defmac
2643
2644 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_RTX (@var{count}, @var{frameaddr})
2645 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the value of the return
2646 address for the frame @var{count} steps up from the current frame, after
2647 the prologue. @var{frameaddr} is the frame pointer of the @var{count}
2648 frame, or the frame pointer of the @var{count} @minus{} 1 frame if
2649 @code{RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME} is defined.
2650
2651 The value of the expression must always be the correct address when
2652 @var{count} is zero, but may be @code{NULL_RTX} if there is no way to
2653 determine the return address of other frames.
2654 @end defmac
2655
2656 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_IN_PREVIOUS_FRAME
2657 Define this if the return address of a particular stack frame is accessed
2658 from the frame pointer of the previous stack frame.
2659 @end defmac
2660
2661 @defmac INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX
2662 A C expression whose value is RTL representing the location of the
2663 incoming return address at the beginning of any function, before the
2664 prologue. This RTL is either a @code{REG}, indicating that the return
2665 value is saved in @samp{REG}, or a @code{MEM} representing a location in
2666 the stack.
2667
2668 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2669 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2670
2671 If this RTL is a @code{REG}, you should also define
2672 @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (REGNO)}.
2673 @end defmac
2674
2675 @defmac DWARF_ALT_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN
2676 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 column
2677 number that may be used as an alternative return column. The column
2678 must not correspond to any gcc hard register (that is, it must not
2679 be in the range of @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM}).
2680
2681 This macro can be useful if @code{DWARF_FRAME_RETURN_COLUMN} is set to a
2682 general register, but an alternative column needs to be used for signal
2683 frames. Some targets have also used different frame return columns
2684 over time.
2685 @end defmac
2686
2687 @defmac DWARF_ZERO_REG
2688 A C expression whose value is an integer giving a DWARF 2 register
2689 number that is considered to always have the value zero. This should
2690 only be defined if the target has an architected zero register, and
2691 someone decided it was a good idea to use that register number to
2692 terminate the stack backtrace. New ports should avoid this.
2693 @end defmac
2694
2695 @hook TARGET_DWARF_HANDLE_FRAME_UNSPEC
2696
2697 @defmac INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET
2698 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2699 from the value of the stack pointer register to the top of the stack
2700 frame at the beginning of any function, before the prologue. The top of
2701 the frame is defined to be the value of the stack pointer in the
2702 previous frame, just before the call instruction.
2703
2704 You only need to define this macro if you want to support call frame
2705 debugging information like that provided by DWARF 2.
2706 @end defmac
2707
2708 @defmac ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2709 A C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset, in bytes,
2710 from the argument pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa). The
2711 final value should coincide with that calculated by
2712 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}. Which is unfortunately not usable
2713 during virtual register instantiation.
2714
2715 The default value for this macro is
2716 @code{FIRST_PARM_OFFSET (fundecl) + crtl->args.pretend_args_size},
2717 which is correct for most machines; in general, the arguments are found
2718 immediately before the stack frame. Note that this is not the case on
2719 some targets that save registers into the caller's frame, such as SPARC
2720 and rs6000, and so such targets need to define this macro.
2721
2722 You only need to define this macro if the default is incorrect, and you
2723 want to support call frame debugging information like that provided by
2724 DWARF 2.
2725 @end defmac
2726
2727 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2728 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2729 in bytes from the frame pointer to the canonical frame address (cfa).
2730 The final value should coincide with that calculated by
2731 @code{INCOMING_FRAME_SP_OFFSET}.
2732
2733 Normally the CFA is calculated as an offset from the argument pointer,
2734 via @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}, but if the argument pointer is
2735 variable due to the ABI, this may not be possible. If this macro is
2736 defined, it implies that the virtual register instantiation should be
2737 based on the frame pointer instead of the argument pointer. Only one
2738 of @code{FRAME_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET} and @code{ARG_POINTER_CFA_OFFSET}
2739 should be defined.
2740 @end defmac
2741
2742 @defmac CFA_FRAME_BASE_OFFSET (@var{fundecl})
2743 If defined, a C expression whose value is an integer giving the offset
2744 in bytes from the canonical frame address (cfa) to the frame base used
2745 in DWARF 2 debug information. The default is zero. A different value
2746 may reduce the size of debug information on some ports.
2747 @end defmac
2748
2749 @node Exception Handling
2750 @subsection Exception Handling Support
2751 @cindex exception handling
2752
2753 @defmac EH_RETURN_DATA_REGNO (@var{N})
2754 A C expression whose value is the @var{N}th register number used for
2755 data by exception handlers, or @code{INVALID_REGNUM} if fewer than
2756 @var{N} registers are usable.
2757
2758 The exception handling library routines communicate with the exception
2759 handlers via a set of agreed upon registers. Ideally these registers
2760 should be call-clobbered; it is possible to use call-saved registers,
2761 but may negatively impact code size. The target must support at least
2762 2 data registers, but should define 4 if there are enough free registers.
2763
2764 You must define this macro if you want to support call frame exception
2765 handling like that provided by DWARF 2.
2766 @end defmac
2767
2768 @defmac EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX
2769 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2770 to store a stack adjustment to be applied before function return.
2771 This is used to unwind the stack to an exception handler's call frame.
2772 It will be assigned zero on code paths that return normally.
2773
2774 Typically this is a call-clobbered hard register that is otherwise
2775 untouched by the epilogue, but could also be a stack slot.
2776
2777 Do not define this macro if the stack pointer is saved and restored
2778 by the regular prolog and epilog code in the call frame itself; in
2779 this case, the exception handling library routines will update the
2780 stack location to be restored in place. Otherwise, you must define
2781 this macro if you want to support call frame exception handling like
2782 that provided by DWARF 2.
2783 @end defmac
2784
2785 @defmac EH_RETURN_HANDLER_RTX
2786 A C expression whose value is RTL representing a location in which
2787 to store the address of an exception handler to which we should
2788 return. It will not be assigned on code paths that return normally.
2789
2790 Typically this is the location in the call frame at which the normal
2791 return address is stored. For targets that return by popping an
2792 address off the stack, this might be a memory address just below
2793 the @emph{target} call frame rather than inside the current call
2794 frame. If defined, @code{EH_RETURN_STACKADJ_RTX} will have already
2795 been assigned, so it may be used to calculate the location of the
2796 target call frame.
2797
2798 Some targets have more complex requirements than storing to an
2799 address calculable during initial code generation. In that case
2800 the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern should be used instead.
2801
2802 If you want to support call frame exception handling, you must
2803 define either this macro or the @code{eh_return} instruction pattern.
2804 @end defmac
2805
2806 @defmac RETURN_ADDR_OFFSET
2807 If defined, an integer-valued C expression for which rtl will be generated
2808 to add it to the exception handler address before it is searched in the
2809 exception handling tables, and to subtract it again from the address before
2810 using it to return to the exception handler.
2811 @end defmac
2812
2813 @defmac ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT (@var{code}, @var{global})
2814 This macro chooses the encoding of pointers embedded in the exception
2815 handling sections. If at all possible, this should be defined such
2816 that the exception handling section will not require dynamic relocations,
2817 and so may be read-only.
2818
2819 @var{code} is 0 for data, 1 for code labels, 2 for function pointers.
2820 @var{global} is true if the symbol may be affected by dynamic relocations.
2821 The macro should return a combination of the @code{DW_EH_PE_*} defines
2822 as found in @file{dwarf2.h}.
2823
2824 If this macro is not defined, pointers will not be encoded but
2825 represented directly.
2826 @end defmac
2827
2828 @defmac ASM_MAYBE_OUTPUT_ENCODED_ADDR_RTX (@var{file}, @var{encoding}, @var{size}, @var{addr}, @var{done})
2829 This macro allows the target to emit whatever special magic is required
2830 to represent the encoding chosen by @code{ASM_PREFERRED_EH_DATA_FORMAT}.
2831 Generic code takes care of pc-relative and indirect encodings; this must
2832 be defined if the target uses text-relative or data-relative encodings.
2833
2834 This is a C statement that branches to @var{done} if the format was
2835 handled. @var{encoding} is the format chosen, @var{size} is the number
2836 of bytes that the format occupies, @var{addr} is the @code{SYMBOL_REF}
2837 to be emitted.
2838 @end defmac
2839
2840 @defmac MD_FALLBACK_FRAME_STATE_FOR (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2841 This macro allows the target to add CPU and operating system specific
2842 code to the call-frame unwinder for use when there is no unwind data
2843 available. The most common reason to implement this macro is to unwind
2844 through signal frames.
2845
2846 This macro is called from @code{uw_frame_state_for} in
2847 @file{unwind-dw2.c}, @file{unwind-dw2-xtensa.c} and
2848 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2849 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{context->ra}
2850 for the address of the code being executed and @code{context->cfa} for
2851 the stack pointer value. If the frame can be decoded, the register
2852 save addresses should be updated in @var{fs} and the macro should
2853 evaluate to @code{_URC_NO_REASON}. If the frame cannot be decoded,
2854 the macro should evaluate to @code{_URC_END_OF_STACK}.
2855
2856 For proper signal handling in Java this macro is accompanied by
2857 @code{MAKE_THROW_FRAME}, defined in @file{libjava/include/*-signal.h} headers.
2858 @end defmac
2859
2860 @defmac MD_HANDLE_UNWABI (@var{context}, @var{fs})
2861 This macro allows the target to add operating system specific code to the
2862 call-frame unwinder to handle the IA-64 @code{.unwabi} unwinding directive,
2863 usually used for signal or interrupt frames.
2864
2865 This macro is called from @code{uw_update_context} in libgcc's
2866 @file{unwind-ia64.c}. @var{context} is an @code{_Unwind_Context};
2867 @var{fs} is an @code{_Unwind_FrameState}. Examine @code{fs->unwabi}
2868 for the abi and context in the @code{.unwabi} directive. If the
2869 @code{.unwabi} directive can be handled, the register save addresses should
2870 be updated in @var{fs}.
2871 @end defmac
2872
2873 @defmac TARGET_USES_WEAK_UNWIND_INFO
2874 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target requires unwind
2875 info to be given comdat linkage. Define it to be @code{1} if comdat
2876 linkage is necessary. The default is @code{0}.
2877 @end defmac
2878
2879 @node Stack Checking
2880 @subsection Specifying How Stack Checking is Done
2881
2882 GCC will check that stack references are within the boundaries of the
2883 stack, if the option @option{-fstack-check} is specified, in one of
2884 three ways:
2885
2886 @enumerate
2887 @item
2888 If the value of the @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC
2889 will assume that you have arranged for full stack checking to be done
2890 at appropriate places in the configuration files. GCC will not do
2891 other special processing.
2892
2893 @item
2894 If @code{STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN} is zero and the value of the
2895 @code{STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN} macro is nonzero, GCC will assume
2896 that you have arranged for static stack checking (checking of the
2897 static stack frame of functions) to be done at appropriate places
2898 in the configuration files. GCC will only emit code to do dynamic
2899 stack checking (checking on dynamic stack allocations) using the third
2900 approach below.
2901
2902 @item
2903 If neither of the above are true, GCC will generate code to periodically
2904 ``probe'' the stack pointer using the values of the macros defined below.
2905 @end enumerate
2906
2907 If neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined,
2908 GCC will change its allocation strategy for large objects if the option
2909 @option{-fstack-check} is specified: they will always be allocated
2910 dynamically if their size exceeds @code{STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE} bytes.
2911
2912 @defmac STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2913 A nonzero value if stack checking is done by the configuration files in a
2914 machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if stack checking
2915 is required by the ABI of your machine or if you would like to do stack
2916 checking in some more efficient way than the generic approach. The default
2917 value of this macro is zero.
2918 @end defmac
2919
2920 @defmac STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN
2921 A nonzero value if static stack checking is done by the configuration files
2922 in a machine-dependent manner. You should define this macro if you would
2923 like to do static stack checking in some more efficient way than the generic
2924 approach. The default value of this macro is zero.
2925 @end defmac
2926
2927 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROBE_INTERVAL_EXP
2928 An integer specifying the interval at which GCC must generate stack probe
2929 instructions, defined as 2 raised to this integer. You will normally
2930 define this macro so that the interval be no larger than the size of
2931 the ``guard pages'' at the end of a stack area. The default value
2932 of 12 (4096-byte interval) is suitable for most systems.
2933 @end defmac
2934
2935 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MOVING_SP
2936 An integer which is nonzero if GCC should move the stack pointer page by page
2937 when doing probes. This can be necessary on systems where the stack pointer
2938 contains the bottom address of the memory area accessible to the executing
2939 thread at any point in time. In this situation an alternate signal stack
2940 is required in order to be able to recover from a stack overflow. The
2941 default value of this macro is zero.
2942 @end defmac
2943
2944 @defmac STACK_CHECK_PROTECT
2945 The number of bytes of stack needed to recover from a stack overflow, for
2946 languages where such a recovery is supported. The default value of 75 words
2947 with the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism and
2948 8192 bytes with other exception handling mechanisms should be adequate for
2949 most machines.
2950 @end defmac
2951
2952 The following macros are relevant only if neither STACK_CHECK_BUILTIN
2953 nor STACK_CHECK_STATIC_BUILTIN is defined; you can omit them altogether
2954 in the opposite case.
2955
2956 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_FRAME_SIZE
2957 The maximum size of a stack frame, in bytes. GCC will generate probe
2958 instructions in non-leaf functions to ensure at least this many bytes of
2959 stack are available. If a stack frame is larger than this size, stack
2960 checking will not be reliable and GCC will issue a warning. The
2961 default is chosen so that GCC only generates one instruction on most
2962 systems. You should normally not change the default value of this macro.
2963 @end defmac
2964
2965 @defmac STACK_CHECK_FIXED_FRAME_SIZE
2966 GCC uses this value to generate the above warning message. It
2967 represents the amount of fixed frame used by a function, not including
2968 space for any callee-saved registers, temporaries and user variables.
2969 You need only specify an upper bound for this amount and will normally
2970 use the default of four words.
2971 @end defmac
2972
2973 @defmac STACK_CHECK_MAX_VAR_SIZE
2974 The maximum size, in bytes, of an object that GCC will place in the
2975 fixed area of the stack frame when the user specifies
2976 @option{-fstack-check}.
2977 GCC computed the default from the values of the above macros and you will
2978 normally not need to override that default.
2979 @end defmac
2980
2981 @need 2000
2982 @node Frame Registers
2983 @subsection Registers That Address the Stack Frame
2984
2985 @c prevent bad page break with this line
2986 This discusses registers that address the stack frame.
2987
2988 @defmac STACK_POINTER_REGNUM
2989 The register number of the stack pointer register, which must also be a
2990 fixed register according to @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}. On most machines,
2991 the hardware determines which register this is.
2992 @end defmac
2993
2994 @defmac FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
2995 The register number of the frame pointer register, which is used to
2996 access automatic variables in the stack frame. On some machines, the
2997 hardware determines which register this is. On other machines, you can
2998 choose any register you wish for this purpose.
2999 @end defmac
3000
3001 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3002 On some machines the offset between the frame pointer and starting
3003 offset of the automatic variables is not known until after register
3004 allocation has been done (for example, because the saved registers are
3005 between these two locations). On those machines, define
3006 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} the number of a special, fixed register to
3007 be used internally until the offset is known, and define
3008 @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} to be the actual hard register number
3009 used for the frame pointer.
3010
3011 You should define this macro only in the very rare circumstances when it
3012 is not possible to calculate the offset between the frame pointer and
3013 the automatic variables until after register allocation has been
3014 completed. When this macro is defined, you must also indicate in your
3015 definition of @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} how to eliminate
3016 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM} into either @code{HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}
3017 or @code{STACK_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3018
3019 Do not define this macro if it would be the same as
3020 @code{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM}.
3021 @end defmac
3022
3023 @defmac ARG_POINTER_REGNUM
3024 The register number of the arg pointer register, which is used to access
3025 the function's argument list. On some machines, this is the same as the
3026 frame pointer register. On some machines, the hardware determines which
3027 register this is. On other machines, you can choose any register you
3028 wish for this purpose. If this is not the same register as the frame
3029 pointer register, then you must mark it as a fixed register according to
3030 @code{FIXED_REGISTERS}, or arrange to be able to eliminate it
3031 (@pxref{Elimination}).
3032 @end defmac
3033
3034 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_FRAME_POINTER
3035 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3036 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{frame_pointer_rtx} should be
3037 the same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM
3038 == FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3039 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3040 @end defmac
3041
3042 @defmac HARD_FRAME_POINTER_IS_ARG_POINTER
3043 Define this to a preprocessor constant that is nonzero if
3044 @code{hard_frame_pointer_rtx} and @code{arg_pointer_rtx} should be the
3045 same. The default definition is @samp{(HARD_FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM ==
3046 ARG_POINTER_REGNUM)}; you only need to define this macro if that
3047 definition is not suitable for use in preprocessor conditionals.
3048 @end defmac
3049
3050 @defmac RETURN_ADDRESS_POINTER_REGNUM
3051 The register number of the return address pointer register, which is used to
3052 access the current function's return address from the stack. On some
3053 machines, the return address is not at a fixed offset from the frame
3054 pointer or stack pointer or argument pointer. This register can be defined
3055 to point to the return address on the stack, and then be converted by
3056 @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} into either the frame pointer or stack pointer.
3057
3058 Do not define this macro unless there is no other way to get the return
3059 address from the stack.
3060 @end defmac
3061
3062 @defmac STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM
3063 @defmacx STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM
3064 Register numbers used for passing a function's static chain pointer. If
3065 register windows are used, the register number as seen by the called
3066 function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM}, while the register
3067 number as seen by the calling function is @code{STATIC_CHAIN_REGNUM}. If
3068 these registers are the same, @code{STATIC_CHAIN_INCOMING_REGNUM} need
3069 not be defined.
3070
3071 The static chain register need not be a fixed register.
3072
3073 If the static chain is passed in memory, these macros should not be
3074 defined; instead, the @code{TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN} hook should be used.
3075 @end defmac
3076
3077 @hook TARGET_STATIC_CHAIN
3078
3079 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3080 This macro specifies the maximum number of hard registers that can be
3081 saved in a call frame. This is used to size data structures used in
3082 DWARF2 exception handling.
3083
3084 Prior to GCC 3.0, this macro was needed in order to establish a stable
3085 exception handling ABI in the face of adding new hard registers for ISA
3086 extensions. In GCC 3.0 and later, the EH ABI is insulated from changes
3087 in the number of hard registers. Nevertheless, this macro can still be
3088 used to reduce the runtime memory requirements of the exception handling
3089 routines, which can be substantial if the ISA contains a lot of
3090 registers that are not call-saved.
3091
3092 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3093 @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER}.
3094 @end defmac
3095
3096 @defmac PRE_GCC3_DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS
3097
3098 This macro is similar to @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}, but is provided
3099 for backward compatibility in pre GCC 3.0 compiled code.
3100
3101 If this macro is not defined, it defaults to
3102 @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGISTERS}.
3103 @end defmac
3104
3105 @defmac DWARF_REG_TO_UNWIND_COLUMN (@var{regno})
3106
3107 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3108 is different than the internal representation for unwind column.
3109 Given a dwarf register, this macro should return the internal unwind
3110 column number to use instead.
3111
3112 See the PowerPC's SPE target for an example.
3113 @end defmac
3114
3115 @defmac DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM (@var{regno})
3116
3117 Define this macro if the target's representation for dwarf registers
3118 used in .eh_frame or .debug_frame is different from that used in other
3119 debug info sections. Given a GCC hard register number, this macro
3120 should return the .eh_frame register number. The default is
3121 @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})}.
3122
3123 @end defmac
3124
3125 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_REG_OUT (@var{regno}, @var{for_eh})
3126
3127 Define this macro to map register numbers held in the call frame info
3128 that GCC has collected using @code{DWARF_FRAME_REGNUM} to those that
3129 should be output in .debug_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is zero) and
3130 .eh_frame (@code{@var{for_eh}} is nonzero). The default is to
3131 return @code{@var{regno}}.
3132
3133 @end defmac
3134
3135 @defmac REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3136
3137 Define this macro if the target stores register values as
3138 @code{_Unwind_Word} type in unwind context. It should be defined if
3139 target register size is larger than the size of @code{void *}. The
3140 default is to store register values as @code{void *} type.
3141
3142 @end defmac
3143
3144 @defmac ASSUME_EXTENDED_UNWIND_CONTEXT
3145
3146 Define this macro to be 1 if the target always uses extended unwind
3147 context with version, args_size and by_value fields. If it is undefined,
3148 it will be defined to 1 when @code{REG_VALUE_IN_UNWIND_CONTEXT} is
3149 defined and 0 otherwise.
3150
3151 @end defmac
3152
3153 @node Elimination
3154 @subsection Eliminating Frame Pointer and Arg Pointer
3155
3156 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3157 This is about eliminating the frame pointer and arg pointer.
3158
3159 @hook TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED
3160
3161 @findex get_frame_size
3162 @defmac INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET (@var{depth-var})
3163 A C statement to store in the variable @var{depth-var} the difference
3164 between the frame pointer and the stack pointer values immediately after
3165 the function prologue. The value would be computed from information
3166 such as the result of @code{get_frame_size ()} and the tables of
3167 registers @code{regs_ever_live} and @code{call_used_regs}.
3168
3169 If @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is defined, this macro will be not be used and
3170 need not be defined. Otherwise, it must be defined even if
3171 @code{TARGET_FRAME_POINTER_REQUIRED} always returns true; in that
3172 case, you may set @var{depth-var} to anything.
3173 @end defmac
3174
3175 @defmac ELIMINABLE_REGS
3176 If defined, this macro specifies a table of register pairs used to
3177 eliminate unneeded registers that point into the stack frame. If it is not
3178 defined, the only elimination attempted by the compiler is to replace
3179 references to the frame pointer with references to the stack pointer.
3180
3181 The definition of this macro is a list of structure initializations, each
3182 of which specifies an original and replacement register.
3183
3184 On some machines, the position of the argument pointer is not known until
3185 the compilation is completed. In such a case, a separate hard register
3186 must be used for the argument pointer. This register can be eliminated by
3187 replacing it with either the frame pointer or the argument pointer,
3188 depending on whether or not the frame pointer has been eliminated.
3189
3190 In this case, you might specify:
3191 @smallexample
3192 #define ELIMINABLE_REGS \
3193 @{@{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3194 @{ARG_POINTER_REGNUM, FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM@}, \
3195 @{FRAME_POINTER_REGNUM, STACK_POINTER_REGNUM@}@}
3196 @end smallexample
3197
3198 Note that the elimination of the argument pointer with the stack pointer is
3199 specified first since that is the preferred elimination.
3200 @end defmac
3201
3202 @hook TARGET_CAN_ELIMINATE
3203
3204 @defmac INITIAL_ELIMINATION_OFFSET (@var{from-reg}, @var{to-reg}, @var{offset-var})
3205 This macro is similar to @code{INITIAL_FRAME_POINTER_OFFSET}. It
3206 specifies the initial difference between the specified pair of
3207 registers. This macro must be defined if @code{ELIMINABLE_REGS} is
3208 defined.
3209 @end defmac
3210
3211 @node Stack Arguments
3212 @subsection Passing Function Arguments on the Stack
3213 @cindex arguments on stack
3214 @cindex stack arguments
3215
3216 The macros in this section control how arguments are passed
3217 on the stack. See the following section for other macros that
3218 control passing certain arguments in registers.
3219
3220 @hook TARGET_PROMOTE_PROTOTYPES
3221
3222 @defmac PUSH_ARGS
3223 A C expression. If nonzero, push insns will be used to pass
3224 outgoing arguments.
3225 If the target machine does not have a push instruction, set it to zero.
3226 That directs GCC to use an alternate strategy: to
3227 allocate the entire argument block and then store the arguments into
3228 it. When @code{PUSH_ARGS} is nonzero, @code{PUSH_ROUNDING} must be defined too.
3229 @end defmac
3230
3231 @defmac PUSH_ARGS_REVERSED
3232 A C expression. If nonzero, function arguments will be evaluated from
3233 last to first, rather than from first to last. If this macro is not
3234 defined, it defaults to @code{PUSH_ARGS} on targets where the stack
3235 and args grow in opposite directions, and 0 otherwise.
3236 @end defmac
3237
3238 @defmac PUSH_ROUNDING (@var{npushed})
3239 A C expression that is the number of bytes actually pushed onto the
3240 stack when an instruction attempts to push @var{npushed} bytes.
3241
3242 On some machines, the definition
3243
3244 @smallexample
3245 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (BYTES)
3246 @end smallexample
3247
3248 @noindent
3249 will suffice. But on other machines, instructions that appear
3250 to push one byte actually push two bytes in an attempt to maintain
3251 alignment. Then the definition should be
3252
3253 @smallexample
3254 #define PUSH_ROUNDING(BYTES) (((BYTES) + 1) & ~1)
3255 @end smallexample
3256
3257 If the value of this macro has a type, it should be an unsigned type.
3258 @end defmac
3259
3260 @findex outgoing_args_size
3261 @findex crtl->outgoing_args_size
3262 @defmac ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS
3263 A C expression. If nonzero, the maximum amount of space required for outgoing arguments
3264 will be computed and placed into
3265 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}. No space will be pushed
3266 onto the stack for each call; instead, the function prologue should
3267 increase the stack frame size by this amount.
3268
3269 Setting both @code{PUSH_ARGS} and @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS}
3270 is not proper.
3271 @end defmac
3272
3273 @defmac REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3274 Define this macro if functions should assume that stack space has been
3275 allocated for arguments even when their values are passed in
3276 registers.
3277
3278 The value of this macro is the size, in bytes, of the area reserved for
3279 arguments passed in registers for the function represented by @var{fndecl},
3280 which can be zero if GCC is calling a library function.
3281 The argument @var{fndecl} can be the FUNCTION_DECL, or the type itself
3282 of the function.
3283
3284 This space can be allocated by the caller, or be a part of the
3285 machine-dependent stack frame: @code{OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} says
3286 which.
3287 @end defmac
3288 @c above is overfull. not sure what to do. --mew 5feb93 did
3289 @c something, not sure if it looks good. --mew 10feb93
3290
3291 @defmac INCOMING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fndecl})
3292 Like @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE}, but for incoming register arguments.
3293 Define this macro if space guaranteed when compiling a function body
3294 is different to space required when making a call, a situation that
3295 can arise with K&R style function definitions.
3296 @end defmac
3297
3298 @defmac OUTGOING_REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE (@var{fntype})
3299 Define this to a nonzero value if it is the responsibility of the
3300 caller to allocate the area reserved for arguments passed in registers
3301 when calling a function of @var{fntype}. @var{fntype} may be NULL
3302 if the function called is a library function.
3303
3304 If @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, this macro controls
3305 whether the space for these arguments counts in the value of
3306 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size}.
3307 @end defmac
3308
3309 @defmac STACK_PARMS_IN_REG_PARM_AREA
3310 Define this macro if @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} is defined, but the
3311 stack parameters don't skip the area specified by it.
3312 @c i changed this, makes more sens and it should have taken care of the
3313 @c overfull.. not as specific, tho. --mew 5feb93
3314
3315 Normally, when a parameter is not passed in registers, it is placed on the
3316 stack beyond the @code{REG_PARM_STACK_SPACE} area. Defining this macro
3317 suppresses this behavior and causes the parameter to be passed on the
3318 stack in its natural location.
3319 @end defmac
3320
3321 @hook TARGET_RETURN_POPS_ARGS
3322
3323 @defmac CALL_POPS_ARGS (@var{cum})
3324 A C expression that should indicate the number of bytes a call sequence
3325 pops off the stack. It is added to the value of @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS}
3326 when compiling a function call.
3327
3328 @var{cum} is the variable in which all arguments to the called function
3329 have been accumulated.
3330
3331 On certain architectures, such as the SH5, a call trampoline is used
3332 that pops certain registers off the stack, depending on the arguments
3333 that have been passed to the function. Since this is a property of the
3334 call site, not of the called function, @code{RETURN_POPS_ARGS} is not
3335 appropriate.
3336 @end defmac
3337
3338 @node Register Arguments
3339 @subsection Passing Arguments in Registers
3340 @cindex arguments in registers
3341 @cindex registers arguments
3342
3343 This section describes the macros which let you control how various
3344 types of arguments are passed in registers or how they are arranged in
3345 the stack.
3346
3347 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG
3348
3349 @hook TARGET_MUST_PASS_IN_STACK
3350
3351 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_INCOMING_ARG
3352
3353 @hook TARGET_USE_PSEUDO_PIC_REG
3354
3355 @hook TARGET_INIT_PIC_REG
3356
3357 @hook TARGET_ARG_PARTIAL_BYTES
3358
3359 @hook TARGET_PASS_BY_REFERENCE
3360
3361 @hook TARGET_CALLEE_COPIES
3362
3363 @defmac CUMULATIVE_ARGS
3364 A C type for declaring a variable that is used as the first argument
3365 of @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG} and other related values. For some
3366 target machines, the type @code{int} suffices and can hold the number
3367 of bytes of argument so far.
3368
3369 There is no need to record in @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS} anything about the
3370 arguments that have been passed on the stack. The compiler has other
3371 variables to keep track of that. For target machines on which all
3372 arguments are passed on the stack, there is no need to store anything in
3373 @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}; however, the data structure must exist and
3374 should not be empty, so use @code{int}.
3375 @end defmac
3376
3377 @defmac OVERRIDE_ABI_FORMAT (@var{fndecl})
3378 If defined, this macro is called before generating any code for a
3379 function, but after the @var{cfun} descriptor for the function has been
3380 created. The back end may use this macro to update @var{cfun} to
3381 reflect an ABI other than that which would normally be used by default.
3382 If the compiler is generating code for a compiler-generated function,
3383 @var{fndecl} may be @code{NULL}.
3384 @end defmac
3385
3386 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname}, @var{fndecl}, @var{n_named_args})
3387 A C statement (sans semicolon) for initializing the variable
3388 @var{cum} for the state at the beginning of the argument list. The
3389 variable has type @code{CUMULATIVE_ARGS}. The value of @var{fntype}
3390 is the tree node for the data type of the function which will receive
3391 the args, or 0 if the args are to a compiler support library function.
3392 For direct calls that are not libcalls, @var{fndecl} contain the
3393 declaration node of the function. @var{fndecl} is also set when
3394 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used to find arguments for the function
3395 being compiled. @var{n_named_args} is set to the number of named
3396 arguments, including a structure return address if it is passed as a
3397 parameter, when making a call. When processing incoming arguments,
3398 @var{n_named_args} is set to @minus{}1.
3399
3400 When processing a call to a compiler support library function,
3401 @var{libname} identifies which one. It is a @code{symbol_ref} rtx which
3402 contains the name of the function, as a string. @var{libname} is 0 when
3403 an ordinary C function call is being processed. Thus, each time this
3404 macro is called, either @var{libname} or @var{fntype} is nonzero, but
3405 never both of them at once.
3406 @end defmac
3407
3408 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_LIBCALL_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{mode}, @var{libname})
3409 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but only used for outgoing libcalls,
3410 it gets a @code{MODE} argument instead of @var{fntype}, that would be
3411 @code{NULL}. @var{indirect} would always be zero, too. If this macro
3412 is not defined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS (cum, NULL_RTX, libname,
3413 0)} is used instead.
3414 @end defmac
3415
3416 @defmac INIT_CUMULATIVE_INCOMING_ARGS (@var{cum}, @var{fntype}, @var{libname})
3417 Like @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} but overrides it for the purposes of
3418 finding the arguments for the function being compiled. If this macro is
3419 undefined, @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS} is used instead.
3420
3421 The value passed for @var{libname} is always 0, since library routines
3422 with special calling conventions are never compiled with GCC@. The
3423 argument @var{libname} exists for symmetry with
3424 @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}.
3425 @c could use "this macro" in place of @code{INIT_CUMULATIVE_ARGS}, maybe.
3426 @c --mew 5feb93 i switched the order of the sentences. --mew 10feb93
3427 @end defmac
3428
3429 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ADVANCE
3430
3431 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_OFFSET (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3432 If defined, a C expression that is the number of bytes to add to the
3433 offset of the argument passed in memory. This is needed for the SPU,
3434 which passes @code{char} and @code{short} arguments in the preferred
3435 slot that is in the middle of the quad word instead of starting at the
3436 top.
3437 @end defmac
3438
3439 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type})
3440 If defined, a C expression which determines whether, and in which direction,
3441 to pad out an argument with extra space. The value should be of type
3442 @code{enum direction}: either @code{upward} to pad above the argument,
3443 @code{downward} to pad below, or @code{none} to inhibit padding.
3444
3445 The @emph{amount} of padding is not controlled by this macro, but by the
3446 target hook @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY}. It is
3447 always just enough to reach the next multiple of that boundary.
3448
3449 This macro has a default definition which is right for most systems.
3450 For little-endian machines, the default is to pad upward. For
3451 big-endian machines, the default is to pad downward for an argument of
3452 constant size shorter than an @code{int}, and upward otherwise.
3453 @end defmac
3454
3455 @defmac PAD_VARARGS_DOWN
3456 If defined, a C expression which determines whether the default
3457 implementation of va_arg will attempt to pad down before reading the
3458 next argument, if that argument is smaller than its aligned space as
3459 controlled by @code{PARM_BOUNDARY}. If this macro is not defined, all such
3460 arguments are padded down if @code{BYTES_BIG_ENDIAN} is true.
3461 @end defmac
3462
3463 @defmac BLOCK_REG_PADDING (@var{mode}, @var{type}, @var{first})
3464 Specify padding for the last element of a block move between registers and
3465 memory. @var{first} is nonzero if this is the only element. Defining this
3466 macro allows better control of register function parameters on big-endian
3467 machines, without using @code{PARALLEL} rtl. In particular,
3468 @code{MUST_PASS_IN_STACK} need not test padding and mode of types in
3469 registers, as there is no longer a "wrong" part of a register; For example,
3470 a three byte aggregate may be passed in the high part of a register if so
3471 required.
3472 @end defmac
3473
3474 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_BOUNDARY
3475
3476 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ARG_ROUND_BOUNDARY
3477
3478 @defmac FUNCTION_ARG_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3479 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3480 register in which function arguments are sometimes passed. This does
3481 @emph{not} include implicit arguments such as the static chain and
3482 the structure-value address. On many machines, no registers can be
3483 used for this purpose since all function arguments are pushed on the
3484 stack.
3485 @end defmac
3486
3487 @hook TARGET_SPLIT_COMPLEX_ARG
3488
3489 @hook TARGET_BUILD_BUILTIN_VA_LIST
3490
3491 @hook TARGET_ENUM_VA_LIST_P
3492
3493 @hook TARGET_FN_ABI_VA_LIST
3494
3495 @hook TARGET_CANONICAL_VA_LIST_TYPE
3496
3497 @hook TARGET_GIMPLIFY_VA_ARG_EXPR
3498
3499 @hook TARGET_VALID_POINTER_MODE
3500
3501 @hook TARGET_REF_MAY_ALIAS_ERRNO
3502
3503 @hook TARGET_SCALAR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3504
3505 @hook TARGET_VECTOR_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3506
3507 @hook TARGET_ARRAY_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3508
3509 @hook TARGET_LIBGCC_FLOATING_MODE_SUPPORTED_P
3510
3511 @hook TARGET_SMALL_REGISTER_CLASSES_FOR_MODE_P
3512
3513 @node Scalar Return
3514 @subsection How Scalar Function Values Are Returned
3515 @cindex return values in registers
3516 @cindex values, returned by functions
3517 @cindex scalars, returned as values
3518
3519 This section discusses the macros that control returning scalars as
3520 values---values that can fit in registers.
3521
3522 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE
3523
3524 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE (@var{valtype}, @var{func})
3525 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} for
3526 a new target instead.
3527 @end defmac
3528
3529 @defmac LIBCALL_VALUE (@var{mode})
3530 A C expression to create an RTX representing the place where a library
3531 function returns a value of mode @var{mode}.
3532
3533 Note that ``library function'' in this context means a compiler
3534 support routine, used to perform arithmetic, whose name is known
3535 specially by the compiler and was not mentioned in the C code being
3536 compiled.
3537 @end defmac
3538
3539 @hook TARGET_LIBCALL_VALUE
3540
3541 @defmac FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P (@var{regno})
3542 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{regno} is the number of a hard
3543 register in which the values of called function may come back.
3544
3545 A register whose use for returning values is limited to serving as the
3546 second of a pair (for a value of type @code{double}, say) need not be
3547 recognized by this macro. So for most machines, this definition
3548 suffices:
3549
3550 @smallexample
3551 #define FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P(N) ((N) == 0)
3552 @end smallexample
3553
3554 If the machine has register windows, so that the caller and the called
3555 function use different registers for the return value, this macro
3556 should recognize only the caller's register numbers.
3557
3558 This macro has been deprecated. Use @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P}
3559 for a new target instead.
3560 @end defmac
3561
3562 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P
3563
3564 @defmac APPLY_RESULT_SIZE
3565 Define this macro if @samp{untyped_call} and @samp{untyped_return}
3566 need more space than is implied by @code{FUNCTION_VALUE_REGNO_P} for
3567 saving and restoring an arbitrary return value.
3568 @end defmac
3569
3570 @hook TARGET_OMIT_STRUCT_RETURN_REG
3571
3572 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MSB
3573
3574 @node Aggregate Return
3575 @subsection How Large Values Are Returned
3576 @cindex aggregates as return values
3577 @cindex large return values
3578 @cindex returning aggregate values
3579 @cindex structure value address
3580
3581 When a function value's mode is @code{BLKmode} (and in some other
3582 cases), the value is not returned according to
3583 @code{TARGET_FUNCTION_VALUE} (@pxref{Scalar Return}). Instead, the
3584 caller passes the address of a block of memory in which the value
3585 should be stored. This address is called the @dfn{structure value
3586 address}.
3587
3588 This section describes how to control returning structure values in
3589 memory.
3590
3591 @hook TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY
3592
3593 @defmac DEFAULT_PCC_STRUCT_RETURN
3594 Define this macro to be 1 if all structure and union return values must be
3595 in memory. Since this results in slower code, this should be defined
3596 only if needed for compatibility with other compilers or with an ABI@.
3597 If you define this macro to be 0, then the conventions used for structure
3598 and union return values are decided by the @code{TARGET_RETURN_IN_MEMORY}
3599 target hook.
3600
3601 If not defined, this defaults to the value 1.
3602 @end defmac
3603
3604 @hook TARGET_STRUCT_VALUE_RTX
3605
3606 @defmac PCC_STATIC_STRUCT_RETURN
3607 Define this macro if the usual system convention on the target machine
3608 for returning structures and unions is for the called function to return
3609 the address of a static variable containing the value.
3610
3611 Do not define this if the usual system convention is for the caller to
3612 pass an address to the subroutine.
3613
3614 This macro has effect in @option{-fpcc-struct-return} mode, but it does
3615 nothing when you use @option{-freg-struct-return} mode.
3616 @end defmac
3617
3618 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_RESULT_MODE
3619
3620 @hook TARGET_GET_RAW_ARG_MODE
3621
3622 @node Caller Saves
3623 @subsection Caller-Saves Register Allocation
3624
3625 If you enable it, GCC can save registers around function calls. This
3626 makes it possible to use call-clobbered registers to hold variables that
3627 must live across calls.
3628
3629 @defmac HARD_REGNO_CALLER_SAVE_MODE (@var{regno}, @var{nregs})
3630 A C expression specifying which mode is required for saving @var{nregs}
3631 of a pseudo-register in call-clobbered hard register @var{regno}. If
3632 @var{regno} is unsuitable for caller save, @code{VOIDmode} should be
3633 returned. For most machines this macro need not be defined since GCC
3634 will select the smallest suitable mode.
3635 @end defmac
3636
3637 @node Function Entry
3638 @subsection Function Entry and Exit
3639 @cindex function entry and exit
3640 @cindex prologue
3641 @cindex epilogue
3642
3643 This section describes the macros that output function entry
3644 (@dfn{prologue}) and exit (@dfn{epilogue}) code.
3645
3646 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE
3647
3648 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_END_PROLOGUE
3649
3650 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_BEGIN_EPILOGUE
3651
3652 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_EPILOGUE
3653
3654 @itemize @bullet
3655 @item
3656 @findex pretend_args_size
3657 @findex crtl->args.pretend_args_size
3658 A region of @code{crtl->args.pretend_args_size} bytes of
3659 uninitialized space just underneath the first argument arriving on the
3660 stack. (This may not be at the very start of the allocated stack region
3661 if the calling sequence has pushed anything else since pushing the stack
3662 arguments. But usually, on such machines, nothing else has been pushed
3663 yet, because the function prologue itself does all the pushing.) This
3664 region is used on machines where an argument may be passed partly in
3665 registers and partly in memory, and, in some cases to support the
3666 features in @code{<stdarg.h>}.
3667
3668 @item
3669 An area of memory used to save certain registers used by the function.
3670 The size of this area, which may also include space for such things as
3671 the return address and pointers to previous stack frames, is
3672 machine-specific and usually depends on which registers have been used
3673 in the function. Machines with register windows often do not require
3674 a save area.
3675
3676 @item
3677 A region of at least @var{size} bytes, possibly rounded up to an allocation
3678 boundary, to contain the local variables of the function. On some machines,
3679 this region and the save area may occur in the opposite order, with the
3680 save area closer to the top of the stack.
3681
3682 @item
3683 @cindex @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} and stack frames
3684 Optionally, when @code{ACCUMULATE_OUTGOING_ARGS} is defined, a region of
3685 @code{crtl->outgoing_args_size} bytes to be used for outgoing
3686 argument lists of the function. @xref{Stack Arguments}.
3687 @end itemize
3688
3689 @defmac EXIT_IGNORE_STACK
3690 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if the return
3691 instruction or the function epilogue ignores the value of the stack
3692 pointer; in other words, if it is safe to delete an instruction to
3693 adjust the stack pointer before a return from the function. The
3694 default is 0.
3695
3696 Note that this macro's value is relevant only for functions for which
3697 frame pointers are maintained. It is never safe to delete a final
3698 stack adjustment in a function that has no frame pointer, and the
3699 compiler knows this regardless of @code{EXIT_IGNORE_STACK}.
3700 @end defmac
3701
3702 @defmac EPILOGUE_USES (@var{regno})
3703 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3704 used by the epilogue or the @samp{return} pattern. The stack and frame
3705 pointer registers are already assumed to be used as needed.
3706 @end defmac
3707
3708 @defmac EH_USES (@var{regno})
3709 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero for registers that are
3710 used by the exception handling mechanism, and so should be considered live
3711 on entry to an exception edge.
3712 @end defmac
3713
3714 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3715
3716 @hook TARGET_ASM_CAN_OUTPUT_MI_THUNK
3717
3718 @node Profiling
3719 @subsection Generating Code for Profiling
3720 @cindex profiling, code generation
3721
3722 These macros will help you generate code for profiling.
3723
3724 @defmac FUNCTION_PROFILER (@var{file}, @var{labelno})
3725 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some
3726 assembler code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount}.
3727
3728 @findex mcount
3729 The details of how @code{mcount} expects to be called are determined by
3730 your operating system environment, not by GCC@. To figure them out,
3731 compile a small program for profiling using the system's installed C
3732 compiler and look at the assembler code that results.
3733
3734 Older implementations of @code{mcount} expect the address of a counter
3735 variable to be loaded into some register. The name of this variable is
3736 @samp{LP} followed by the number @var{labelno}, so you would generate
3737 the name using @samp{LP%d} in a @code{fprintf}.
3738 @end defmac
3739
3740 @defmac PROFILE_HOOK
3741 A C statement or compound statement to output to @var{file} some assembly
3742 code to call the profiling subroutine @code{mcount} even the target does
3743 not support profiling.
3744 @end defmac
3745
3746 @defmac NO_PROFILE_COUNTERS
3747 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if the
3748 @code{mcount} subroutine on your system does not need a counter variable
3749 allocated for each function. This is true for almost all modern
3750 implementations. If you define this macro, you must not use the
3751 @var{labelno} argument to @code{FUNCTION_PROFILER}.
3752 @end defmac
3753
3754 @defmac PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
3755 Define this macro if the code for function profiling should come before
3756 the function prologue. Normally, the profiling code comes after.
3757 @end defmac
3758
3759 @hook TARGET_KEEP_LEAF_WHEN_PROFILED
3760
3761 @node Tail Calls
3762 @subsection Permitting tail calls
3763 @cindex tail calls
3764
3765 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_OK_FOR_SIBCALL
3766
3767 @hook TARGET_EXTRA_LIVE_ON_ENTRY
3768
3769 @hook TARGET_SET_UP_BY_PROLOGUE
3770
3771 @hook TARGET_WARN_FUNC_RETURN
3772
3773 @node Stack Smashing Protection
3774 @subsection Stack smashing protection
3775 @cindex stack smashing protection
3776
3777 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_GUARD
3778
3779 @hook TARGET_STACK_PROTECT_FAIL
3780
3781 @hook TARGET_SUPPORTS_SPLIT_STACK
3782
3783 @node Miscellaneous Register Hooks
3784 @subsection Miscellaneous register hooks
3785 @cindex miscellaneous register hooks
3786
3787 @hook TARGET_CALL_FUSAGE_CONTAINS_NON_CALLEE_CLOBBERS
3788
3789 @node Varargs
3790 @section Implementing the Varargs Macros
3791 @cindex varargs implementation
3792
3793 GCC comes with an implementation of @code{<varargs.h>} and
3794 @code{<stdarg.h>} that work without change on machines that pass arguments
3795 on the stack. Other machines require their own implementations of
3796 varargs, and the two machine independent header files must have
3797 conditionals to include it.
3798
3799 ISO @code{<stdarg.h>} differs from traditional @code{<varargs.h>} mainly in
3800 the calling convention for @code{va_start}. The traditional
3801 implementation takes just one argument, which is the variable in which
3802 to store the argument pointer. The ISO implementation of
3803 @code{va_start} takes an additional second argument. The user is
3804 supposed to write the last named argument of the function here.
3805
3806 However, @code{va_start} should not use this argument. The way to find
3807 the end of the named arguments is with the built-in functions described
3808 below.
3809
3810 @defmac __builtin_saveregs ()
3811 Use this built-in function to save the argument registers in memory so
3812 that the varargs mechanism can access them. Both ISO and traditional
3813 versions of @code{va_start} must use @code{__builtin_saveregs}, unless
3814 you use @code{TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS} (see below) instead.
3815
3816 On some machines, @code{__builtin_saveregs} is open-coded under the
3817 control of the target hook @code{TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS}. On
3818 other machines, it calls a routine written in assembler language,
3819 found in @file{libgcc2.c}.
3820
3821 Code generated for the call to @code{__builtin_saveregs} appears at the
3822 beginning of the function, as opposed to where the call to
3823 @code{__builtin_saveregs} is written, regardless of what the code is.
3824 This is because the registers must be saved before the function starts
3825 to use them for its own purposes.
3826 @c i rewrote the first sentence above to fix an overfull hbox. --mew
3827 @c 10feb93
3828 @end defmac
3829
3830 @defmac __builtin_next_arg (@var{lastarg})
3831 This builtin returns the address of the first anonymous stack
3832 argument, as type @code{void *}. If @code{ARGS_GROW_DOWNWARD}, it
3833 returns the address of the location above the first anonymous stack
3834 argument. Use it in @code{va_start} to initialize the pointer for
3835 fetching arguments from the stack. Also use it in @code{va_start} to
3836 verify that the second parameter @var{lastarg} is the last named argument
3837 of the current function.
3838 @end defmac
3839
3840 @defmac __builtin_classify_type (@var{object})
3841 Since each machine has its own conventions for which data types are
3842 passed in which kind of register, your implementation of @code{va_arg}
3843 has to embody these conventions. The easiest way to categorize the
3844 specified data type is to use @code{__builtin_classify_type} together
3845 with @code{sizeof} and @code{__alignof__}.
3846
3847 @code{__builtin_classify_type} ignores the value of @var{object},
3848 considering only its data type. It returns an integer describing what
3849 kind of type that is---integer, floating, pointer, structure, and so on.
3850
3851 The file @file{typeclass.h} defines an enumeration that you can use to
3852 interpret the values of @code{__builtin_classify_type}.
3853 @end defmac
3854
3855 These machine description macros help implement varargs:
3856
3857 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN_SAVEREGS
3858
3859 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARGS
3860
3861 @hook TARGET_STRICT_ARGUMENT_NAMING
3862
3863 @hook TARGET_CALL_ARGS
3864
3865 @hook TARGET_END_CALL_ARGS
3866
3867 @hook TARGET_PRETEND_OUTGOING_VARARGS_NAMED
3868
3869 @hook TARGET_LOAD_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3870
3871 @hook TARGET_STORE_BOUNDS_FOR_ARG
3872
3873 @hook TARGET_LOAD_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3874
3875 @hook TARGET_STORE_RETURNED_BOUNDS
3876
3877 @hook TARGET_CHKP_FUNCTION_VALUE_BOUNDS
3878
3879 @hook TARGET_SETUP_INCOMING_VARARG_BOUNDS
3880
3881 @node Trampolines
3882 @section Trampolines for Nested Functions
3883 @cindex trampolines for nested functions
3884 @cindex nested functions, trampolines for
3885
3886 A @dfn{trampoline} is a small piece of code that is created at run time
3887 when the address of a nested function is taken. It normally resides on
3888 the stack, in the stack frame of the containing function. These macros
3889 tell GCC how to generate code to allocate and initialize a
3890 trampoline.
3891
3892 The instructions in the trampoline must do two things: load a constant
3893 address into the static chain register, and jump to the real address of
3894 the nested function. On CISC machines such as the m68k, this requires
3895 two instructions, a move immediate and a jump. Then the two addresses
3896 exist in the trampoline as word-long immediate operands. On RISC
3897 machines, it is often necessary to load each address into a register in
3898 two parts. Then pieces of each address form separate immediate
3899 operands.
3900
3901 The code generated to initialize the trampoline must store the variable
3902 parts---the static chain value and the function address---into the
3903 immediate operands of the instructions. On a CISC machine, this is
3904 simply a matter of copying each address to a memory reference at the
3905 proper offset from the start of the trampoline. On a RISC machine, it
3906 may be necessary to take out pieces of the address and store them
3907 separately.
3908
3909 @hook TARGET_ASM_TRAMPOLINE_TEMPLATE
3910
3911 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SECTION
3912 Return the section into which the trampoline template is to be placed
3913 (@pxref{Sections}). The default value is @code{readonly_data_section}.
3914 @end defmac
3915
3916 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_SIZE
3917 A C expression for the size in bytes of the trampoline, as an integer.
3918 @end defmac
3919
3920 @defmac TRAMPOLINE_ALIGNMENT
3921 Alignment required for trampolines, in bits.
3922
3923 If you don't define this macro, the value of @code{FUNCTION_ALIGNMENT}
3924 is used for aligning trampolines.
3925 @end defmac
3926
3927 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_INIT
3928
3929 @hook TARGET_TRAMPOLINE_ADJUST_ADDRESS
3930
3931 Implementing trampolines is difficult on many machines because they have
3932 separate instruction and data caches. Writing into a stack location
3933 fails to clear the memory in the instruction cache, so when the program
3934 jumps to that location, it executes the old contents.
3935
3936 Here are two possible solutions. One is to clear the relevant parts of
3937 the instruction cache whenever a trampoline is set up. The other is to
3938 make all trampolines identical, by having them jump to a standard
3939 subroutine. The former technique makes trampoline execution faster; the
3940 latter makes initialization faster.
3941
3942 To clear the instruction cache when a trampoline is initialized, define
3943 the following macro.
3944
3945 @defmac CLEAR_INSN_CACHE (@var{beg}, @var{end})
3946 If defined, expands to a C expression clearing the @emph{instruction
3947 cache} in the specified interval. The definition of this macro would
3948 typically be a series of @code{asm} statements. Both @var{beg} and
3949 @var{end} are both pointer expressions.
3950 @end defmac
3951
3952 To use a standard subroutine, define the following macro. In addition,
3953 you must make sure that the instructions in a trampoline fill an entire
3954 cache line with identical instructions, or else ensure that the
3955 beginning of the trampoline code is always aligned at the same point in
3956 its cache line. Look in @file{m68k.h} as a guide.
3957
3958 @defmac TRANSFER_FROM_TRAMPOLINE
3959 Define this macro if trampolines need a special subroutine to do their
3960 work. The macro should expand to a series of @code{asm} statements
3961 which will be compiled with GCC@. They go in a library function named
3962 @code{__transfer_from_trampoline}.
3963
3964 If you need to avoid executing the ordinary prologue code of a compiled
3965 C function when you jump to the subroutine, you can do so by placing a
3966 special label of your own in the assembler code. Use one @code{asm}
3967 statement to generate an assembler label, and another to make the label
3968 global. Then trampolines can use that label to jump directly to your
3969 special assembler code.
3970 @end defmac
3971
3972 @node Library Calls
3973 @section Implicit Calls to Library Routines
3974 @cindex library subroutine names
3975 @cindex @file{libgcc.a}
3976
3977 @c prevent bad page break with this line
3978 Here is an explanation of implicit calls to library routines.
3979
3980 @defmac DECLARE_LIBRARY_RENAMES
3981 This macro, if defined, should expand to a piece of C code that will get
3982 expanded when compiling functions for libgcc.a. It can be used to
3983 provide alternate names for GCC's internal library functions if there
3984 are ABI-mandated names that the compiler should provide.
3985 @end defmac
3986
3987 @findex set_optab_libfunc
3988 @findex init_one_libfunc
3989 @hook TARGET_INIT_LIBFUNCS
3990
3991 @hook TARGET_LIBFUNC_GNU_PREFIX
3992
3993 @defmac FLOAT_LIB_COMPARE_RETURNS_BOOL (@var{mode}, @var{comparison})
3994 This macro should return @code{true} if the library routine that
3995 implements the floating point comparison operator @var{comparison} in
3996 mode @var{mode} will return a boolean, and @var{false} if it will
3997 return a tristate.
3998
3999 GCC's own floating point libraries return tristates from the
4000 comparison operators, so the default returns false always. Most ports
4001 don't need to define this macro.
4002 @end defmac
4003
4004 @defmac TARGET_LIB_INT_CMP_BIASED
4005 This macro should evaluate to @code{true} if the integer comparison
4006 functions (like @code{__cmpdi2}) return 0 to indicate that the first
4007 operand is smaller than the second, 1 to indicate that they are equal,
4008 and 2 to indicate that the first operand is greater than the second.
4009 If this macro evaluates to @code{false} the comparison functions return
4010 @minus{}1, 0, and 1 instead of 0, 1, and 2. If the target uses the routines
4011 in @file{libgcc.a}, you do not need to define this macro.
4012 @end defmac
4013
4014 @defmac TARGET_HAS_NO_HW_DIVIDE
4015 This macro should be defined if the target has no hardware divide
4016 instructions. If this macro is defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4017 make use of simple logical and arithmetic operations for 64-bit
4018 division. If the macro is not defined, GCC will use an algorithm which
4019 make use of a 64-bit by 32-bit divide primitive.
4020 @end defmac
4021
4022 @cindex @code{EDOM}, implicit usage
4023 @findex matherr
4024 @defmac TARGET_EDOM
4025 The value of @code{EDOM} on the target machine, as a C integer constant
4026 expression. If you don't define this macro, GCC does not attempt to
4027 deposit the value of @code{EDOM} into @code{errno} directly. Look in
4028 @file{/usr/include/errno.h} to find the value of @code{EDOM} on your
4029 system.
4030
4031 If you do not define @code{TARGET_EDOM}, then compiled code reports
4032 domain errors by calling the library function and letting it report the
4033 error. If mathematical functions on your system use @code{matherr} when
4034 there is an error, then you should leave @code{TARGET_EDOM} undefined so
4035 that @code{matherr} is used normally.
4036 @end defmac
4037
4038 @cindex @code{errno}, implicit usage
4039 @defmac GEN_ERRNO_RTX
4040 Define this macro as a C expression to create an rtl expression that
4041 refers to the global ``variable'' @code{errno}. (On certain systems,
4042 @code{errno} may not actually be a variable.) If you don't define this
4043 macro, a reasonable default is used.
4044 @end defmac
4045
4046 @hook TARGET_LIBC_HAS_FUNCTION
4047
4048 @defmac NEXT_OBJC_RUNTIME
4049 Set this macro to 1 to use the "NeXT" Objective-C message sending conventions
4050 by default. This calling convention involves passing the object, the selector
4051 and the method arguments all at once to the method-lookup library function.
4052 This is the usual setting when targeting Darwin/Mac OS X systems, which have
4053 the NeXT runtime installed.
4054
4055 If the macro is set to 0, the "GNU" Objective-C message sending convention
4056 will be used by default. This convention passes just the object and the
4057 selector to the method-lookup function, which returns a pointer to the method.
4058
4059 In either case, it remains possible to select code-generation for the alternate
4060 scheme, by means of compiler command line switches.
4061 @end defmac
4062
4063 @node Addressing Modes
4064 @section Addressing Modes
4065 @cindex addressing modes
4066
4067 @c prevent bad page break with this line
4068 This is about addressing modes.
4069
4070 @defmac HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT
4071 @defmacx HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT
4072 @defmacx HAVE_POST_INCREMENT
4073 @defmacx HAVE_POST_DECREMENT
4074 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre-increment,
4075 pre-decrement, post-increment, or post-decrement addressing respectively.
4076 @end defmac
4077
4078 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_DISP
4079 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_DISP
4080 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4081 post-address side-effect generation involving constants other than
4082 the size of the memory operand.
4083 @end defmac
4084
4085 @defmac HAVE_PRE_MODIFY_REG
4086 @defmacx HAVE_POST_MODIFY_REG
4087 A C expression that is nonzero if the machine supports pre- or
4088 post-address side-effect generation involving a register displacement.
4089 @end defmac
4090
4091 @defmac CONSTANT_ADDRESS_P (@var{x})
4092 A C expression that is 1 if the RTX @var{x} is a constant which
4093 is a valid address. On most machines the default definition of
4094 @code{(CONSTANT_P (@var{x}) && GET_CODE (@var{x}) != CONST_DOUBLE)}
4095 is acceptable, but a few machines are more restrictive as to which
4096 constant addresses are supported.
4097 @end defmac
4098
4099 @defmac CONSTANT_P (@var{x})
4100 @code{CONSTANT_P}, which is defined by target-independent code,
4101 accepts integer-values expressions whose values are not explicitly
4102 known, such as @code{symbol_ref}, @code{label_ref}, and @code{high}
4103 expressions and @code{const} arithmetic expressions, in addition to
4104 @code{const_int} and @code{const_double} expressions.
4105 @end defmac
4106
4107 @defmac MAX_REGS_PER_ADDRESS
4108 A number, the maximum number of registers that can appear in a valid
4109 memory address. Note that it is up to you to specify a value equal to
4110 the maximum number that @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} would ever
4111 accept.
4112 @end defmac
4113
4114 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
4115
4116 @defmac TARGET_MEM_CONSTRAINT
4117 A single character to be used instead of the default @code{'m'}
4118 character for general memory addresses. This defines the constraint
4119 letter which matches the memory addresses accepted by
4120 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P}. Define this macro if you want to
4121 support new address formats in your back end without changing the
4122 semantics of the @code{'m'} constraint. This is necessary in order to
4123 preserve functionality of inline assembly constructs using the
4124 @code{'m'} constraint.
4125 @end defmac
4126
4127 @defmac FIND_BASE_TERM (@var{x})
4128 A C expression to determine the base term of address @var{x},
4129 or to provide a simplified version of @var{x} from which @file{alias.c}
4130 can easily find the base term. This macro is used in only two places:
4131 @code{find_base_value} and @code{find_base_term} in @file{alias.c}.
4132
4133 It is always safe for this macro to not be defined. It exists so
4134 that alias analysis can understand machine-dependent addresses.
4135
4136 The typical use of this macro is to handle addresses containing
4137 a label_ref or symbol_ref within an UNSPEC@.
4138 @end defmac
4139
4140 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4141
4142 @defmac LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS (@var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{opnum}, @var{type}, @var{ind_levels}, @var{win})
4143 A C compound statement that attempts to replace @var{x}, which is an address
4144 that needs reloading, with a valid memory address for an operand of mode
4145 @var{mode}. @var{win} will be a C statement label elsewhere in the code.
4146 It is not necessary to define this macro, but it might be useful for
4147 performance reasons.
4148
4149 For example, on the i386, it is sometimes possible to use a single
4150 reload register instead of two by reloading a sum of two pseudo
4151 registers into a register. On the other hand, for number of RISC
4152 processors offsets are limited so that often an intermediate address
4153 needs to be generated in order to address a stack slot. By defining
4154 @code{LEGITIMIZE_RELOAD_ADDRESS} appropriately, the intermediate addresses
4155 generated for adjacent some stack slots can be made identical, and thus
4156 be shared.
4157
4158 @emph{Note}: This macro should be used with caution. It is necessary
4159 to know something of how reload works in order to effectively use this,
4160 and it is quite easy to produce macros that build in too much knowledge
4161 of reload internals.
4162
4163 @emph{Note}: This macro must be able to reload an address created by a
4164 previous invocation of this macro. If it fails to handle such addresses
4165 then the compiler may generate incorrect code or abort.
4166
4167 @findex push_reload
4168 The macro definition should use @code{push_reload} to indicate parts that
4169 need reloading; @var{opnum}, @var{type} and @var{ind_levels} are usually
4170 suitable to be passed unaltered to @code{push_reload}.
4171
4172 The code generated by this macro must not alter the substructure of
4173 @var{x}. If it transforms @var{x} into a more legitimate form, it
4174 should assign @var{x} (which will always be a C variable) a new value.
4175 This also applies to parts that you change indirectly by calling
4176 @code{push_reload}.
4177
4178 @findex strict_memory_address_p
4179 The macro definition may use @code{strict_memory_address_p} to test if
4180 the address has become legitimate.
4181
4182 @findex copy_rtx
4183 If you want to change only a part of @var{x}, one standard way of doing
4184 this is to use @code{copy_rtx}. Note, however, that it unshares only a
4185 single level of rtl. Thus, if the part to be changed is not at the
4186 top level, you'll need to replace first the top level.
4187 It is not necessary for this macro to come up with a legitimate
4188 address; but often a machine-dependent strategy can generate better code.
4189 @end defmac
4190
4191 @hook TARGET_MODE_DEPENDENT_ADDRESS_P
4192
4193 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_CONSTANT_P
4194
4195 @hook TARGET_DELEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
4196
4197 @hook TARGET_CONST_NOT_OK_FOR_DEBUG_P
4198
4199 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_FORCE_CONST_MEM
4200
4201 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_CONSTANT_P
4202
4203 @hook TARGET_USE_BLOCKS_FOR_DECL_P
4204
4205 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_RECIPROCAL
4206
4207 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_MASK_FOR_LOAD
4208
4209 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZATION_COST
4210
4211 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VECTOR_ALIGNMENT_REACHABLE
4212
4213 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_VEC_PERM_CONST_OK
4214
4215 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_CONVERSION
4216
4217 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_VECTORIZED_FUNCTION
4218
4219 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_SUPPORT_VECTOR_MISALIGNMENT
4220
4221 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_PREFERRED_SIMD_MODE
4222
4223 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_AUTOVECTORIZE_VECTOR_SIZES
4224
4225 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_INIT_COST
4226
4227 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_ADD_STMT_COST
4228
4229 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_FINISH_COST
4230
4231 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_DESTROY_COST_DATA
4232
4233 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_LOAD
4234
4235 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_TM_STORE
4236
4237 @hook TARGET_VECTORIZE_BUILTIN_GATHER
4238
4239 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_COMPUTE_VECSIZE_AND_SIMDLEN
4240
4241 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_ADJUST
4242
4243 @hook TARGET_SIMD_CLONE_USABLE
4244
4245 @node Anchored Addresses
4246 @section Anchored Addresses
4247 @cindex anchored addresses
4248 @cindex @option{-fsection-anchors}
4249
4250 GCC usually addresses every static object as a separate entity.
4251 For example, if we have:
4252
4253 @smallexample
4254 static int a, b, c;
4255 int foo (void) @{ return a + b + c; @}
4256 @end smallexample
4257
4258 the code for @code{foo} will usually calculate three separate symbolic
4259 addresses: those of @code{a}, @code{b} and @code{c}. On some targets,
4260 it would be better to calculate just one symbolic address and access
4261 the three variables relative to it. The equivalent pseudocode would
4262 be something like:
4263
4264 @smallexample
4265 int foo (void)
4266 @{
4267 register int *xr = &x;
4268 return xr[&a - &x] + xr[&b - &x] + xr[&c - &x];
4269 @}
4270 @end smallexample
4271
4272 (which isn't valid C). We refer to shared addresses like @code{x} as
4273 ``section anchors''. Their use is controlled by @option{-fsection-anchors}.
4274
4275 The hooks below describe the target properties that GCC needs to know
4276 in order to make effective use of section anchors. It won't use
4277 section anchors at all unless either @code{TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET}
4278 or @code{TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET} is set to a nonzero value.
4279
4280 @hook TARGET_MIN_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4281
4282 @hook TARGET_MAX_ANCHOR_OFFSET
4283
4284 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ANCHOR
4285
4286 @hook TARGET_USE_ANCHORS_FOR_SYMBOL_P
4287
4288 @node Condition Code
4289 @section Condition Code Status
4290 @cindex condition code status
4291
4292 The macros in this section can be split in two families, according to the
4293 two ways of representing condition codes in GCC.
4294
4295 The first representation is the so called @code{(cc0)} representation
4296 (@pxref{Jump Patterns}), where all instructions can have an implicit
4297 clobber of the condition codes. The second is the condition code
4298 register representation, which provides better schedulability for
4299 architectures that do have a condition code register, but on which
4300 most instructions do not affect it. The latter category includes
4301 most RISC machines.
4302
4303 The implicit clobbering poses a strong restriction on the placement of
4304 the definition and use of the condition code. In the past the definition
4305 and use were always adjacent. However, recent changes to support trapping
4306 arithmatic may result in the definition and user being in different blocks.
4307 Thus, there may be a @code{NOTE_INSN_BASIC_BLOCK} between them. Additionally,
4308 the definition may be the source of exception handling edges.
4309
4310 These restrictions can prevent important
4311 optimizations on some machines. For example, on the IBM RS/6000, there
4312 is a delay for taken branches unless the condition code register is set
4313 three instructions earlier than the conditional branch. The instruction
4314 scheduler cannot perform this optimization if it is not permitted to
4315 separate the definition and use of the condition code register.
4316
4317 For this reason, it is possible and suggested to use a register to
4318 represent the condition code for new ports. If there is a specific
4319 condition code register in the machine, use a hard register. If the
4320 condition code or comparison result can be placed in any general register,
4321 or if there are multiple condition registers, use a pseudo register.
4322 Registers used to store the condition code value will usually have a mode
4323 that is in class @code{MODE_CC}.
4324
4325 Alternatively, you can use @code{BImode} if the comparison operator is
4326 specified already in the compare instruction. In this case, you are not
4327 interested in most macros in this section.
4328
4329 @menu
4330 * CC0 Condition Codes:: Old style representation of condition codes.
4331 * MODE_CC Condition Codes:: Modern representation of condition codes.
4332 @end menu
4333
4334 @node CC0 Condition Codes
4335 @subsection Representation of condition codes using @code{(cc0)}
4336 @findex cc0
4337
4338 @findex cc_status
4339 The file @file{conditions.h} defines a variable @code{cc_status} to
4340 describe how the condition code was computed (in case the interpretation of
4341 the condition code depends on the instruction that it was set by). This
4342 variable contains the RTL expressions on which the condition code is
4343 currently based, and several standard flags.
4344
4345 Sometimes additional machine-specific flags must be defined in the machine
4346 description header file. It can also add additional machine-specific
4347 information by defining @code{CC_STATUS_MDEP}.
4348
4349 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP
4350 C code for a data type which is used for declaring the @code{mdep}
4351 component of @code{cc_status}. It defaults to @code{int}.
4352
4353 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4354 @end defmac
4355
4356 @defmac CC_STATUS_MDEP_INIT
4357 A C expression to initialize the @code{mdep} field to ``empty''.
4358 The default definition does nothing, since most machines don't use
4359 the field anyway. If you want to use the field, you should probably
4360 define this macro to initialize it.
4361
4362 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4363 @end defmac
4364
4365 @defmac NOTICE_UPDATE_CC (@var{exp}, @var{insn})
4366 A C compound statement to set the components of @code{cc_status}
4367 appropriately for an insn @var{insn} whose body is @var{exp}. It is
4368 this macro's responsibility to recognize insns that set the condition
4369 code as a byproduct of other activity as well as those that explicitly
4370 set @code{(cc0)}.
4371
4372 This macro is not used on machines that do not use @code{cc0}.
4373
4374 If there are insns that do not set the condition code but do alter
4375 other machine registers, this macro must check to see whether they
4376 invalidate the expressions that the condition code is recorded as
4377 reflecting. For example, on the 68000, insns that store in address
4378 registers do not set the condition code, which means that usually
4379 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} can leave @code{cc_status} unaltered for such
4380 insns. But suppose that the previous insn set the condition code
4381 based on location @samp{a4@@(102)} and the current insn stores a new
4382 value in @samp{a4}. Although the condition code is not changed by
4383 this, it will no longer be true that it reflects the contents of
4384 @samp{a4@@(102)}. Therefore, @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must alter
4385 @code{cc_status} in this case to say that nothing is known about the
4386 condition code value.
4387
4388 The definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} must be prepared to deal
4389 with the results of peephole optimization: insns whose patterns are
4390 @code{parallel} RTXs containing various @code{reg}, @code{mem} or
4391 constants which are just the operands. The RTL structure of these
4392 insns is not sufficient to indicate what the insns actually do. What
4393 @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} should do when it sees one is just to run
4394 @code{CC_STATUS_INIT}.
4395
4396 A possible definition of @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC} is to call a function
4397 that looks at an attribute (@pxref{Insn Attributes}) named, for example,
4398 @samp{cc}. This avoids having detailed information about patterns in
4399 two places, the @file{md} file and in @code{NOTICE_UPDATE_CC}.
4400 @end defmac
4401
4402 @node MODE_CC Condition Codes
4403 @subsection Representation of condition codes using registers
4404 @findex CCmode
4405 @findex MODE_CC
4406
4407 @defmac SELECT_CC_MODE (@var{op}, @var{x}, @var{y})
4408 On many machines, the condition code may be produced by other instructions
4409 than compares, for example the branch can use directly the condition
4410 code set by a subtract instruction. However, on some machines
4411 when the condition code is set this way some bits (such as the overflow
4412 bit) are not set in the same way as a test instruction, so that a different
4413 branch instruction must be used for some conditional branches. When
4414 this happens, use the machine mode of the condition code register to
4415 record different formats of the condition code register. Modes can
4416 also be used to record which compare instruction (e.g. a signed or an
4417 unsigned comparison) produced the condition codes.
4418
4419 If other modes than @code{CCmode} are required, add them to
4420 @file{@var{machine}-modes.def} and define @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} to choose
4421 a mode given an operand of a compare. This is needed because the modes
4422 have to be chosen not only during RTL generation but also, for example,
4423 by instruction combination. The result of @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} should
4424 be consistent with the mode used in the patterns; for example to support
4425 the case of the add on the SPARC discussed above, we have the pattern
4426
4427 @smallexample
4428 (define_insn ""
4429 [(set (reg:CC_NOOV 0)
4430 (compare:CC_NOOV
4431 (plus:SI (match_operand:SI 0 "register_operand" "%r")
4432 (match_operand:SI 1 "arith_operand" "rI"))
4433 (const_int 0)))]
4434 ""
4435 "@dots{}")
4436 @end smallexample
4437
4438 @noindent
4439 together with a @code{SELECT_CC_MODE} that returns @code{CC_NOOVmode}
4440 for comparisons whose argument is a @code{plus}:
4441
4442 @smallexample
4443 #define SELECT_CC_MODE(OP,X,Y) \
4444 (GET_MODE_CLASS (GET_MODE (X)) == MODE_FLOAT \
4445 ? ((OP == LT || OP == LE || OP == GT || OP == GE) \
4446 ? CCFPEmode : CCFPmode) \
4447 : ((GET_CODE (X) == PLUS || GET_CODE (X) == MINUS \
4448 || GET_CODE (X) == NEG || GET_CODE (x) == ASHIFT) \
4449 ? CC_NOOVmode : CCmode))
4450 @end smallexample
4451
4452 Another reason to use modes is to retain information on which operands
4453 were used by the comparison; see @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE} later in
4454 this section.
4455
4456 You should define this macro if and only if you define extra CC modes
4457 in @file{@var{machine}-modes.def}.
4458 @end defmac
4459
4460 @hook TARGET_CANONICALIZE_COMPARISON
4461
4462 @defmac REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})
4463 A C expression whose value is one if it is always safe to reverse a
4464 comparison whose mode is @var{mode}. If @code{SELECT_CC_MODE}
4465 can ever return @var{mode} for a floating-point inequality comparison,
4466 then @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} must be zero.
4467
4468 You need not define this macro if it would always returns zero or if the
4469 floating-point format is anything other than @code{IEEE_FLOAT_FORMAT}.
4470 For example, here is the definition used on the SPARC, where floating-point
4471 inequality comparisons are given either @code{CCFPEmode} or @code{CCFPmode}:
4472
4473 @smallexample
4474 #define REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE(MODE) \
4475 ((MODE) != CCFPEmode && (MODE) != CCFPmode)
4476 @end smallexample
4477 @end defmac
4478
4479 @defmac REVERSE_CONDITION (@var{code}, @var{mode})
4480 A C expression whose value is reversed condition code of the @var{code} for
4481 comparison done in CC_MODE @var{mode}. The macro is used only in case
4482 @code{REVERSIBLE_CC_MODE (@var{mode})} is nonzero. Define this macro in case
4483 machine has some non-standard way how to reverse certain conditionals. For
4484 instance in case all floating point conditions are non-trapping, compiler may
4485 freely convert unordered compares to ordered ones. Then definition may look
4486 like:
4487
4488 @smallexample
4489 #define REVERSE_CONDITION(CODE, MODE) \
4490 ((MODE) != CCFPmode ? reverse_condition (CODE) \
4491 : reverse_condition_maybe_unordered (CODE))
4492 @end smallexample
4493 @end defmac
4494
4495 @hook TARGET_FIXED_CONDITION_CODE_REGS
4496
4497 @hook TARGET_CC_MODES_COMPATIBLE
4498
4499 @hook TARGET_FLAGS_REGNUM
4500
4501 @node Costs
4502 @section Describing Relative Costs of Operations
4503 @cindex costs of instructions
4504 @cindex relative costs
4505 @cindex speed of instructions
4506
4507 These macros let you describe the relative speed of various operations
4508 on the target machine.
4509
4510 @defmac REGISTER_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{from}, @var{to})
4511 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} from a
4512 register in class @var{from} to one in class @var{to}. The classes are
4513 expressed using the enumeration values such as @code{GENERAL_REGS}. A
4514 value of 2 is the default; other values are interpreted relative to
4515 that.
4516
4517 It is not required that the cost always equal 2 when @var{from} is the
4518 same as @var{to}; on some machines it is expensive to move between
4519 registers if they are not general registers.
4520
4521 If reload sees an insn consisting of a single @code{set} between two
4522 hard registers, and if @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST} applied to their
4523 classes returns a value of 2, reload does not check to ensure that the
4524 constraints of the insn are met. Setting a cost of other than 2 will
4525 allow reload to verify that the constraints are met. You should do this
4526 if the @samp{mov@var{m}} pattern's constraints do not allow such copying.
4527
4528 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4529 @code{TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST} instead.
4530 @end defmac
4531
4532 @hook TARGET_REGISTER_MOVE_COST
4533
4534 @defmac MEMORY_MOVE_COST (@var{mode}, @var{class}, @var{in})
4535 A C expression for the cost of moving data of mode @var{mode} between a
4536 register of class @var{class} and memory; @var{in} is zero if the value
4537 is to be written to memory, nonzero if it is to be read in. This cost
4538 is relative to those in @code{REGISTER_MOVE_COST}. If moving between
4539 registers and memory is more expensive than between two registers, you
4540 should define this macro to express the relative cost.
4541
4542 If you do not define this macro, GCC uses a default cost of 4 plus
4543 the cost of copying via a secondary reload register, if one is
4544 needed. If your machine requires a secondary reload register to copy
4545 between memory and a register of @var{class} but the reload mechanism is
4546 more complex than copying via an intermediate, define this macro to
4547 reflect the actual cost of the move.
4548
4549 GCC defines the function @code{memory_move_secondary_cost} if
4550 secondary reloads are needed. It computes the costs due to copying via
4551 a secondary register. If your machine copies from memory using a
4552 secondary register in the conventional way but the default base value of
4553 4 is not correct for your machine, define this macro to add some other
4554 value to the result of that function. The arguments to that function
4555 are the same as to this macro.
4556
4557 These macros are obsolete, new ports should use the target hook
4558 @code{TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST} instead.
4559 @end defmac
4560
4561 @hook TARGET_MEMORY_MOVE_COST
4562
4563 @defmac BRANCH_COST (@var{speed_p}, @var{predictable_p})
4564 A C expression for the cost of a branch instruction. A value of 1 is
4565 the default; other values are interpreted relative to that. Parameter
4566 @var{speed_p} is true when the branch in question should be optimized
4567 for speed. When it is false, @code{BRANCH_COST} should return a value
4568 optimal for code size rather than performance. @var{predictable_p} is
4569 true for well-predicted branches. On many architectures the
4570 @code{BRANCH_COST} can be reduced then.
4571 @end defmac
4572
4573 Here are additional macros which do not specify precise relative costs,
4574 but only that certain actions are more expensive than GCC would
4575 ordinarily expect.
4576
4577 @defmac SLOW_BYTE_ACCESS
4578 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if accessing less
4579 than a word of memory (i.e.@: a @code{char} or a @code{short}) is no
4580 faster than accessing a word of memory, i.e., if such access
4581 require more than one instruction or if there is no difference in cost
4582 between byte and (aligned) word loads.
4583
4584 When this macro is not defined, the compiler will access a field by
4585 finding the smallest containing object; when it is defined, a fullword
4586 load will be used if alignment permits. Unless bytes accesses are
4587 faster than word accesses, using word accesses is preferable since it
4588 may eliminate subsequent memory access if subsequent accesses occur to
4589 other fields in the same word of the structure, but to different bytes.
4590 @end defmac
4591
4592 @defmac SLOW_UNALIGNED_ACCESS (@var{mode}, @var{alignment})
4593 Define this macro to be the value 1 if memory accesses described by the
4594 @var{mode} and @var{alignment} parameters have a cost many times greater
4595 than aligned accesses, for example if they are emulated in a trap
4596 handler.
4597
4598 When this macro is nonzero, the compiler will act as if
4599 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} were nonzero when generating code for block
4600 moves. This can cause significantly more instructions to be produced.
4601 Therefore, do not set this macro nonzero if unaligned accesses only add a
4602 cycle or two to the time for a memory access.
4603
4604 If the value of this macro is always zero, it need not be defined. If
4605 this macro is defined, it should produce a nonzero value when
4606 @code{STRICT_ALIGNMENT} is nonzero.
4607 @end defmac
4608
4609 @defmac MOVE_RATIO (@var{speed})
4610 The threshold of number of scalar memory-to-memory move insns, @emph{below}
4611 which a sequence of insns should be generated instead of a
4612 string move insn or a library call. Increasing the value will always
4613 make code faster, but eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4614
4615 Note that on machines where the corresponding move insn is a
4616 @code{define_expand} that emits a sequence of insns, this macro counts
4617 the number of such sequences.
4618
4619 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4620 optimized for speed rather than size.
4621
4622 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4623 @end defmac
4624
4625 @hook TARGET_USE_BY_PIECES_INFRASTRUCTURE_P
4626
4627 @defmac MOVE_MAX_PIECES
4628 A C expression used by @code{move_by_pieces} to determine the largest unit
4629 a load or store used to copy memory is. Defaults to @code{MOVE_MAX}.
4630 @end defmac
4631
4632 @defmac CLEAR_RATIO (@var{speed})
4633 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4634 of insns should be generated to clear memory instead of a string clear insn
4635 or a library call. Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4636 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4637
4638 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4639 optimized for speed rather than size.
4640
4641 If you don't define this, a reasonable default is used.
4642 @end defmac
4643
4644 @defmac SET_RATIO (@var{speed})
4645 The threshold of number of scalar move insns, @emph{below} which a sequence
4646 of insns should be generated to set memory to a constant value, instead of
4647 a block set insn or a library call.
4648 Increasing the value will always make code faster, but
4649 eventually incurs high cost in increased code size.
4650
4651 The parameter @var{speed} is true if the code is currently being
4652 optimized for speed rather than size.
4653
4654 If you don't define this, it defaults to the value of @code{MOVE_RATIO}.
4655 @end defmac
4656
4657 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4658 A C expression used to determine whether a load postincrement is a good
4659 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4660 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4661 @end defmac
4662
4663 @defmac USE_LOAD_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4664 A C expression used to determine whether a load postdecrement is a good
4665 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4666 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4667 @end defmac
4668
4669 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4670 A C expression used to determine whether a load preincrement is a good
4671 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4672 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4673 @end defmac
4674
4675 @defmac USE_LOAD_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4676 A C expression used to determine whether a load predecrement is a good
4677 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4678 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4679 @end defmac
4680
4681 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4682 A C expression used to determine whether a store postincrement is a good
4683 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4684 @code{HAVE_POST_INCREMENT}.
4685 @end defmac
4686
4687 @defmac USE_STORE_POST_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4688 A C expression used to determine whether a store postdecrement is a good
4689 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4690 @code{HAVE_POST_DECREMENT}.
4691 @end defmac
4692
4693 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_INCREMENT (@var{mode})
4694 This macro is used to determine whether a store preincrement is a good
4695 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4696 @code{HAVE_PRE_INCREMENT}.
4697 @end defmac
4698
4699 @defmac USE_STORE_PRE_DECREMENT (@var{mode})
4700 This macro is used to determine whether a store predecrement is a good
4701 thing to use for a given mode. Defaults to the value of
4702 @code{HAVE_PRE_DECREMENT}.
4703 @end defmac
4704
4705 @defmac NO_FUNCTION_CSE
4706 Define this macro if it is as good or better to call a constant
4707 function address than to call an address kept in a register.
4708 @end defmac
4709
4710 @defmac LOGICAL_OP_NON_SHORT_CIRCUIT
4711 Define this macro if a non-short-circuit operation produced by
4712 @samp{fold_range_test ()} is optimal. This macro defaults to true if
4713 @code{BRANCH_COST} is greater than or equal to the value 2.
4714 @end defmac
4715
4716 @hook TARGET_RTX_COSTS
4717
4718 @hook TARGET_ADDRESS_COST
4719
4720 @node Scheduling
4721 @section Adjusting the Instruction Scheduler
4722
4723 The instruction scheduler may need a fair amount of machine-specific
4724 adjustment in order to produce good code. GCC provides several target
4725 hooks for this purpose. It is usually enough to define just a few of
4726 them: try the first ones in this list first.
4727
4728 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ISSUE_RATE
4729
4730 @hook TARGET_SCHED_VARIABLE_ISSUE
4731
4732 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_COST
4733
4734 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ADJUST_PRIORITY
4735
4736 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER
4737
4738 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REORDER2
4739
4740 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_P
4741
4742 @hook TARGET_SCHED_MACRO_FUSION_PAIR_P
4743
4744 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DEPENDENCIES_EVALUATION_HOOK
4745
4746 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT
4747
4748 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH
4749
4750 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_GLOBAL
4751
4752 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FINISH_GLOBAL
4753
4754 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4755
4756 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_PRE_CYCLE_INSN
4757
4758 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4759
4760 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_DFA_POST_CYCLE_INSN
4761
4762 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_PRE_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4763
4764 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_POST_ADVANCE_CYCLE
4765
4766 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD
4767
4768 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_DFA_LOOKAHEAD_GUARD
4769
4770 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BEGIN
4771
4772 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_ISSUE
4773
4774 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_BACKTRACK
4775
4776 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_END
4777
4778 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_INIT
4779
4780 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FIRST_CYCLE_MULTIPASS_FINI
4781
4782 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DFA_NEW_CYCLE
4783
4784 @hook TARGET_SCHED_IS_COSTLY_DEPENDENCE
4785
4786 @hook TARGET_SCHED_H_I_D_EXTENDED
4787
4788 @hook TARGET_SCHED_ALLOC_SCHED_CONTEXT
4789
4790 @hook TARGET_SCHED_INIT_SCHED_CONTEXT
4791
4792 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_CONTEXT
4793
4794 @hook TARGET_SCHED_CLEAR_SCHED_CONTEXT
4795
4796 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FREE_SCHED_CONTEXT
4797
4798 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SPECULATE_INSN
4799
4800 @hook TARGET_SCHED_NEEDS_BLOCK_P
4801
4802 @hook TARGET_SCHED_GEN_SPEC_CHECK
4803
4804 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SET_SCHED_FLAGS
4805
4806 @hook TARGET_SCHED_SMS_RES_MII
4807
4808 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH
4809
4810 @hook TARGET_SCHED_DISPATCH_DO
4811
4812 @hook TARGET_SCHED_EXPOSED_PIPELINE
4813
4814 @hook TARGET_SCHED_REASSOCIATION_WIDTH
4815
4816 @hook TARGET_SCHED_FUSION_PRIORITY
4817
4818 @node Sections
4819 @section Dividing the Output into Sections (Texts, Data, @dots{})
4820 @c the above section title is WAY too long. maybe cut the part between
4821 @c the (...)? --mew 10feb93
4822
4823 An object file is divided into sections containing different types of
4824 data. In the most common case, there are three sections: the @dfn{text
4825 section}, which holds instructions and read-only data; the @dfn{data
4826 section}, which holds initialized writable data; and the @dfn{bss
4827 section}, which holds uninitialized data. Some systems have other kinds
4828 of sections.
4829
4830 @file{varasm.c} provides several well-known sections, such as
4831 @code{text_section}, @code{data_section} and @code{bss_section}.
4832 The normal way of controlling a @code{@var{foo}_section} variable
4833 is to define the associated @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macro,
4834 as described below. The macros are only read once, when @file{varasm.c}
4835 initializes itself, so their values must be run-time constants.
4836 They may however depend on command-line flags.
4837
4838 @emph{Note:} Some run-time files, such @file{crtstuff.c}, also make
4839 use of the @code{@var{FOO}_SECTION_ASM_OP} macros, and expect them
4840 to be string literals.
4841
4842 Some assemblers require a different string to be written every time a
4843 section is selected. If your assembler falls into this category, you
4844 should define the @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS} hook and use
4845 @code{get_unnamed_section} to set up the sections.
4846
4847 You must always create a @code{text_section}, either by defining
4848 @code{TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or by initializing @code{text_section}
4849 in @code{TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS}. The same is true of
4850 @code{data_section} and @code{DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP}. If you do not
4851 create a distinct @code{readonly_data_section}, the default is to
4852 reuse @code{text_section}.
4853
4854 All the other @file{varasm.c} sections are optional, and are null
4855 if the target does not provide them.
4856
4857 @defmac TEXT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4858 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4859 assembler operation that should precede instructions and read-only data.
4860 Normally @code{"\t.text"} is right.
4861 @end defmac
4862
4863 @defmac HOT_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4864 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing most
4865 frequently executed functions of the program. If not defined, GCC will provide
4866 a default definition if the target supports named sections.
4867 @end defmac
4868
4869 @defmac UNLIKELY_EXECUTED_TEXT_SECTION_NAME
4870 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing unlikely
4871 executed functions in the program.
4872 @end defmac
4873
4874 @defmac DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4875 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4876 assembler operation to identify the following data as writable initialized
4877 data. Normally @code{"\t.data"} is right.
4878 @end defmac
4879
4880 @defmac SDATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4881 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4882 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4883 initialized, writable small data.
4884 @end defmac
4885
4886 @defmac READONLY_DATA_SECTION_ASM_OP
4887 A C expression whose value is a string, including spacing, containing the
4888 assembler operation to identify the following data as read-only initialized
4889 data.
4890 @end defmac
4891
4892 @defmac BSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4893 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4894 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4895 uninitialized global data. If not defined, and
4896 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS} not defined,
4897 uninitialized global data will be output in the data section if
4898 @option{-fno-common} is passed, otherwise @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} will be
4899 used.
4900 @end defmac
4901
4902 @defmac SBSS_SECTION_ASM_OP
4903 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4904 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4905 uninitialized, writable small data.
4906 @end defmac
4907
4908 @defmac TLS_COMMON_ASM_OP
4909 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string containing the
4910 assembler operation to identify the following data as thread-local
4911 common data. The default is @code{".tls_common"}.
4912 @end defmac
4913
4914 @defmac TLS_SECTION_ASM_FLAG
4915 If defined, a C expression whose value is a character constant
4916 containing the flag used to mark a section as a TLS section. The
4917 default is @code{'T'}.
4918 @end defmac
4919
4920 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
4921 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4922 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4923 initialization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4924 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{init_section}
4925 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4926 @end defmac
4927
4928 @defmac FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP
4929 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4930 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4931 finalization code. If not defined, GCC will assume such a section does
4932 not exist. This section has no corresponding @code{fini_section}
4933 variable; it is used entirely in runtime code.
4934 @end defmac
4935
4936 @defmac INIT_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4937 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4938 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4939 part of the @code{.init_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4940 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4941 both this macro and @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4942 @end defmac
4943
4944 @defmac FINI_ARRAY_SECTION_ASM_OP
4945 If defined, a C expression whose value is a string, including spacing,
4946 containing the assembler operation to identify the following data as
4947 part of the @code{.fini_array} (or equivalent) section. If not
4948 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. Do not define
4949 both this macro and @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
4950 @end defmac
4951
4952 @defmac CRT_CALL_STATIC_FUNCTION (@var{section_op}, @var{function})
4953 If defined, an ASM statement that switches to a different section
4954 via @var{section_op}, calls @var{function}, and switches back to
4955 the text section. This is used in @file{crtstuff.c} if
4956 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} or @code{FINI_SECTION_ASM_OP} to calls
4957 to initialization and finalization functions from the init and fini
4958 sections. By default, this macro uses a simple function call. Some
4959 ports need hand-crafted assembly code to avoid dependencies on
4960 registers initialized in the function prologue or to ensure that
4961 constant pools don't end up too far way in the text section.
4962 @end defmac
4963
4964 @defmac TARGET_LIBGCC_SDATA_SECTION
4965 If defined, a string which names the section into which small
4966 variables defined in crtstuff and libgcc should go. This is useful
4967 when the target has options for optimizing access to small data, and
4968 you want the crtstuff and libgcc routines to be conservative in what
4969 they expect of your application yet liberal in what your application
4970 expects. For example, for targets with a @code{.sdata} section (like
4971 MIPS), you could compile crtstuff with @code{-G 0} so that it doesn't
4972 require small data support from your application, but use this macro
4973 to put small data into @code{.sdata} so that your application can
4974 access these variables whether it uses small data or not.
4975 @end defmac
4976
4977 @defmac FORCE_CODE_SECTION_ALIGN
4978 If defined, an ASM statement that aligns a code section to some
4979 arbitrary boundary. This is used to force all fragments of the
4980 @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections to have to same alignment
4981 and thus prevent the linker from having to add any padding.
4982 @end defmac
4983
4984 @defmac JUMP_TABLES_IN_TEXT_SECTION
4985 Define this macro to be an expression with a nonzero value if jump
4986 tables (for @code{tablejump} insns) should be output in the text
4987 section, along with the assembler instructions. Otherwise, the
4988 readonly data section is used.
4989
4990 This macro is irrelevant if there is no separate readonly data section.
4991 @end defmac
4992
4993 @hook TARGET_ASM_INIT_SECTIONS
4994
4995 @hook TARGET_ASM_RELOC_RW_MASK
4996
4997 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION
4998
4999 @defmac USE_SELECT_SECTION_FOR_FUNCTIONS
5000 Define this macro if you wish TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION to be called
5001 for @code{FUNCTION_DECL}s as well as for variables and constants.
5002
5003 In the case of a @code{FUNCTION_DECL}, @var{reloc} will be zero if the
5004 function has been determined to be likely to be called, and nonzero if
5005 it is unlikely to be called.
5006 @end defmac
5007
5008 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNIQUE_SECTION
5009
5010 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_RODATA_SECTION
5011
5012 @hook TARGET_ASM_MERGEABLE_RODATA_PREFIX
5013
5014 @hook TARGET_ASM_TM_CLONE_TABLE_SECTION
5015
5016 @hook TARGET_ASM_SELECT_RTX_SECTION
5017
5018 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_DECL_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5019
5020 @hook TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO
5021
5022 @hook TARGET_STRIP_NAME_ENCODING
5023
5024 @hook TARGET_IN_SMALL_DATA_P
5025
5026 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SRODATA_SECTION
5027
5028 @hook TARGET_PROFILE_BEFORE_PROLOGUE
5029
5030 @hook TARGET_BINDS_LOCAL_P
5031
5032 @hook TARGET_HAVE_TLS
5033
5034
5035 @node PIC
5036 @section Position Independent Code
5037 @cindex position independent code
5038 @cindex PIC
5039
5040 This section describes macros that help implement generation of position
5041 independent code. Simply defining these macros is not enough to
5042 generate valid PIC; you must also add support to the hook
5043 @code{TARGET_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P} and to the macro
5044 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS}, as well as @code{LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS}. You
5045 must modify the definition of @samp{movsi} to do something appropriate
5046 when the source operand contains a symbolic address. You may also
5047 need to alter the handling of switch statements so that they use
5048 relative addresses.
5049 @c i rearranged the order of the macros above to try to force one of
5050 @c them to the next line, to eliminate an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
5051
5052 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM
5053 The register number of the register used to address a table of static
5054 data addresses in memory. In some cases this register is defined by a
5055 processor's ``application binary interface'' (ABI)@. When this macro
5056 is defined, RTL is generated for this register once, as with the stack
5057 pointer and frame pointer registers. If this macro is not defined, it
5058 is up to the machine-dependent files to allocate such a register (if
5059 necessary). Note that this register must be fixed when in use (e.g.@:
5060 when @code{flag_pic} is true).
5061 @end defmac
5062
5063 @defmac PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REG_CALL_CLOBBERED
5064 A C expression that is nonzero if the register defined by
5065 @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is clobbered by calls. If not defined,
5066 the default is zero. Do not define
5067 this macro if @code{PIC_OFFSET_TABLE_REGNUM} is not defined.
5068 @end defmac
5069
5070 @defmac LEGITIMATE_PIC_OPERAND_P (@var{x})
5071 A C expression that is nonzero if @var{x} is a legitimate immediate
5072 operand on the target machine when generating position independent code.
5073 You can assume that @var{x} satisfies @code{CONSTANT_P}, so you need not
5074 check this. You can also assume @var{flag_pic} is true, so you need not
5075 check it either. You need not define this macro if all constants
5076 (including @code{SYMBOL_REF}) can be immediate operands when generating
5077 position independent code.
5078 @end defmac
5079
5080 @node Assembler Format
5081 @section Defining the Output Assembler Language
5082
5083 This section describes macros whose principal purpose is to describe how
5084 to write instructions in assembler language---rather than what the
5085 instructions do.
5086
5087 @menu
5088 * File Framework:: Structural information for the assembler file.
5089 * Data Output:: Output of constants (numbers, strings, addresses).
5090 * Uninitialized Data:: Output of uninitialized variables.
5091 * Label Output:: Output and generation of labels.
5092 * Initialization:: General principles of initialization
5093 and termination routines.
5094 * Macros for Initialization::
5095 Specific macros that control the handling of
5096 initialization and termination routines.
5097 * Instruction Output:: Output of actual instructions.
5098 * Dispatch Tables:: Output of jump tables.
5099 * Exception Region Output:: Output of exception region code.
5100 * Alignment Output:: Pseudo ops for alignment and skipping data.
5101 @end menu
5102
5103 @node File Framework
5104 @subsection The Overall Framework of an Assembler File
5105 @cindex assembler format
5106 @cindex output of assembler code
5107
5108 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5109 This describes the overall framework of an assembly file.
5110
5111 @findex default_file_start
5112 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START
5113
5114 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_APP_OFF
5115
5116 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_START_FILE_DIRECTIVE
5117
5118 @hook TARGET_ASM_FILE_END
5119
5120 @deftypefun void file_end_indicate_exec_stack ()
5121 Some systems use a common convention, the @samp{.note.GNU-stack}
5122 special section, to indicate whether or not an object file relies on
5123 the stack being executable. If your system uses this convention, you
5124 should define @code{TARGET_ASM_FILE_END} to this function. If you
5125 need to do other things in that hook, have your hook function call
5126 this function.
5127 @end deftypefun
5128
5129 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_START
5130
5131 @hook TARGET_ASM_LTO_END
5132
5133 @hook TARGET_ASM_CODE_END
5134
5135 @defmac ASM_COMMENT_START
5136 A C string constant describing how to begin a comment in the target
5137 assembler language. The compiler assumes that the comment will end at
5138 the end of the line.
5139 @end defmac
5140
5141 @defmac ASM_APP_ON
5142 A C string constant for text to be output before each @code{asm}
5143 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5144 @code{"#APP"}, which is a comment that has no effect on most
5145 assemblers but tells the GNU assembler that it must check the lines
5146 that follow for all valid assembler constructs.
5147 @end defmac
5148
5149 @defmac ASM_APP_OFF
5150 A C string constant for text to be output after each @code{asm}
5151 statement or group of consecutive ones. Normally this is
5152 @code{"#NO_APP"}, which tells the GNU assembler to resume making the
5153 time-saving assumptions that are valid for ordinary compiler output.
5154 @end defmac
5155
5156 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5157 A C statement to output COFF information or DWARF debugging information
5158 which indicates that filename @var{name} is the current source file to
5159 the stdio stream @var{stream}.
5160
5161 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
5162 for the file format in use is appropriate.
5163 @end defmac
5164
5165 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_SOURCE_FILENAME
5166
5167 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_IDENT
5168
5169 @defmac OUTPUT_QUOTED_STRING (@var{stream}, @var{string})
5170 A C statement to output the string @var{string} to the stdio stream
5171 @var{stream}. If you do not call the function @code{output_quoted_string}
5172 in your config files, GCC will only call it to output filenames to
5173 the assembler source. So you can use it to canonicalize the format
5174 of the filename using this macro.
5175 @end defmac
5176
5177 @hook TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION
5178
5179 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SECTION
5180
5181 @hook TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_SWITCHED_TEXT_SECTIONS
5182
5183 @hook TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS
5184 This flag is true if the target supports @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION}.
5185 It must not be modified by command-line option processing.
5186 @end deftypevr
5187
5188 @anchor{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}
5189 @hook TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS
5190
5191 @hook TARGET_SECTION_TYPE_FLAGS
5192
5193 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES
5194
5195 @hook TARGET_ASM_RECORD_GCC_SWITCHES_SECTION
5196
5197 @need 2000
5198 @node Data Output
5199 @subsection Output of Data
5200
5201
5202 @hook TARGET_ASM_BYTE_OP
5203
5204 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTEGER
5205
5206 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECL_END
5207
5208 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_CONST_EXTRA
5209
5210 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII (@var{stream}, @var{ptr}, @var{len})
5211 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
5212 instruction to assemble a string constant containing the @var{len}
5213 bytes at @var{ptr}. @var{ptr} will be a C expression of type
5214 @code{char *} and @var{len} a C expression of type @code{int}.
5215
5216 If the assembler has a @code{.ascii} pseudo-op as found in the
5217 Berkeley Unix assembler, do not define the macro
5218 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ASCII}.
5219 @end defmac
5220
5221 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FDESC (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{n})
5222 A C statement to output word @var{n} of a function descriptor for
5223 @var{decl}. This must be defined if @code{TARGET_VTABLE_USES_DESCRIPTORS}
5224 is defined, and is otherwise unused.
5225 @end defmac
5226
5227 @defmac CONSTANT_POOL_BEFORE_FUNCTION
5228 You may define this macro as a C expression. You should define the
5229 expression to have a nonzero value if GCC should output the constant
5230 pool for a function before the code for the function, or a zero value if
5231 GCC should output the constant pool after the function. If you do
5232 not define this macro, the usual case, GCC will output the constant
5233 pool before the function.
5234 @end defmac
5235
5236 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_PROLOGUE (@var{file}, @var{funname}, @var{fundecl}, @var{size})
5237 A C statement to output assembler commands to define the start of the
5238 constant pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving
5239 the name of the function. Should the return type of the function
5240 be required, it can be obtained via @var{fundecl}. @var{size}
5241 is the size, in bytes, of the constant pool that will be written
5242 immediately after this call.
5243
5244 If no constant-pool prefix is required, the usual case, this macro need
5245 not be defined.
5246 @end defmac
5247
5248 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SPECIAL_POOL_ENTRY (@var{file}, @var{x}, @var{mode}, @var{align}, @var{labelno}, @var{jumpto})
5249 A C statement (with or without semicolon) to output a constant in the
5250 constant pool, if it needs special treatment. (This macro need not do
5251 anything for RTL expressions that can be output normally.)
5252
5253 The argument @var{file} is the standard I/O stream to output the
5254 assembler code on. @var{x} is the RTL expression for the constant to
5255 output, and @var{mode} is the machine mode (in case @var{x} is a
5256 @samp{const_int}). @var{align} is the required alignment for the value
5257 @var{x}; you should output an assembler directive to force this much
5258 alignment.
5259
5260 The argument @var{labelno} is a number to use in an internal label for
5261 the address of this pool entry. The definition of this macro is
5262 responsible for outputting the label definition at the proper place.
5263 Here is how to do this:
5264
5265 @smallexample
5266 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} (@var{file}, "LC", @var{labelno});
5267 @end smallexample
5268
5269 When you output a pool entry specially, you should end with a
5270 @code{goto} to the label @var{jumpto}. This will prevent the same pool
5271 entry from being output a second time in the usual manner.
5272
5273 You need not define this macro if it would do nothing.
5274 @end defmac
5275
5276 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_POOL_EPILOGUE (@var{file} @var{funname} @var{fundecl} @var{size})
5277 A C statement to output assembler commands to at the end of the constant
5278 pool for a function. @var{funname} is a string giving the name of the
5279 function. Should the return type of the function be required, you can
5280 obtain it via @var{fundecl}. @var{size} is the size, in bytes, of the
5281 constant pool that GCC wrote immediately before this call.
5282
5283 If no constant-pool epilogue is required, the usual case, you need not
5284 define this macro.
5285 @end defmac
5286
5287 @defmac IS_ASM_LOGICAL_LINE_SEPARATOR (@var{C}, @var{STR})
5288 Define this macro as a C expression which is nonzero if @var{C} is
5289 used as a logical line separator by the assembler. @var{STR} points
5290 to the position in the string where @var{C} was found; this can be used if
5291 a line separator uses multiple characters.
5292
5293 If you do not define this macro, the default is that only
5294 the character @samp{;} is treated as a logical line separator.
5295 @end defmac
5296
5297 @hook TARGET_ASM_OPEN_PAREN
5298
5299 These macros are provided by @file{real.h} for writing the definitions
5300 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DOUBLE} and the like:
5301
5302 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5303 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5304 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_LONG_DOUBLE (@var{x}, @var{l})
5305 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5306 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL64 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5307 @defmacx REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL128 (@var{x}, @var{l})
5308 These translate @var{x}, of type @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE}, to the
5309 target's floating point representation, and store its bit pattern in
5310 the variable @var{l}. For @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_SINGLE} and
5311 @code{REAL_VALUE_TO_TARGET_DECIMAL32}, this variable should be a
5312 simple @code{long int}. For the others, it should be an array of
5313 @code{long int}. The number of elements in this array is determined
5314 by the size of the desired target floating point data type: 32 bits of
5315 it go in each @code{long int} array element. Each array element holds
5316 32 bits of the result, even if @code{long int} is wider than 32 bits
5317 on the host machine.
5318
5319 The array element values are designed so that you can print them out
5320 using @code{fprintf} in the order they should appear in the target
5321 machine's memory.
5322 @end defmac
5323
5324 @node Uninitialized Data
5325 @subsection Output of Uninitialized Variables
5326
5327 Each of the macros in this section is used to do the whole job of
5328 outputting a single uninitialized variable.
5329
5330 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5331 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5332 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a common-label named
5333 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5334 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants. It is
5335 possible that @var{size} may be zero, for instance if a struct with no
5336 other member than a zero-length array is defined. In this case, the
5337 backend must output a symbol definition that allocates at least one
5338 byte, both so that the address of the resulting object does not compare
5339 equal to any other, and because some object formats cannot even express
5340 the concept of a zero-sized common symbol, as that is how they represent
5341 an ordinary undefined external.
5342
5343 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5344 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5345 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5346
5347 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5348 common global variables are output.
5349 @end defmac
5350
5351 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5352 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} except takes the required alignment as a
5353 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5354 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON}, and gives you more flexibility in
5355 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5356 as the number of bits.
5357 @end defmac
5358
5359 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_COMMON (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5360 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON} except that @var{decl} of the
5361 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5362 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5363 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_COMMON} and
5364 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_COMMON}. Define this macro when you need to see
5365 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5366 @end defmac
5367
5368 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_BSS (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5369 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5370 @var{stream} the assembler definition of uninitialized global @var{decl} named
5371 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{alignment}
5372 is the alignment specified as the number of bits.
5373
5374 Try to use function @code{asm_output_aligned_bss} defined in file
5375 @file{varasm.c} when defining this macro. If unable, use the expression
5376 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name itself;
5377 before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax for defining
5378 the name, and a newline.
5379
5380 There are two ways of handling global BSS@. One is to define this macro.
5381 The other is to have @code{TARGET_ASM_SELECT_SECTION} return a
5382 switchable BSS section (@pxref{TARGET_HAVE_SWITCHABLE_BSS_SECTIONS}).
5383 You do not need to do both.
5384
5385 Some languages do not have @code{common} data, and require a
5386 non-common form of global BSS in order to handle uninitialized globals
5387 efficiently. C++ is one example of this. However, if the target does
5388 not support global BSS, the front end may choose to make globals
5389 common in order to save space in the object file.
5390 @end defmac
5391
5392 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{rounded})
5393 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5394 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a local-common-label named
5395 @var{name} whose size is @var{size} bytes. The variable @var{rounded}
5396 is the size rounded up to whatever alignment the caller wants.
5397
5398 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5399 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5400 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline.
5401
5402 This macro controls how the assembler definitions of uninitialized
5403 static variables are output.
5404 @end defmac
5405
5406 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5407 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL} except takes the required alignment as a
5408 separate, explicit argument. If you define this macro, it is used in
5409 place of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LOCAL}, and gives you more flexibility in
5410 handling the required alignment of the variable. The alignment is specified
5411 as the number of bits.
5412 @end defmac
5413
5414 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL_LOCAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{size}, @var{alignment})
5415 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL} except that @var{decl} of the
5416 variable to be output, if there is one, or @code{NULL_TREE} if there
5417 is no corresponding variable. If you define this macro, GCC will use it
5418 in place of both @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DECL} and
5419 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGNED_DECL}. Define this macro when you need to see
5420 the variable's decl in order to chose what to output.
5421 @end defmac
5422
5423 @node Label Output
5424 @subsection Output and Generation of Labels
5425
5426 @c prevent bad page break with this line
5427 This is about outputting labels.
5428
5429 @findex assemble_name
5430 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5431 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5432 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name}.
5433 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5434 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5435 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5436 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5437 @end defmac
5438
5439 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5440 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5441 @var{stream} the assembler definition of a label named @var{name} of
5442 a function.
5443 Use the expression @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to
5444 output the name itself; before and after that, output the additional
5445 assembler syntax for defining the name, and a newline. A default
5446 definition of this macro is provided which is correct for most systems.
5447
5448 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5449 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5450 @end defmac
5451
5452 @findex assemble_name_raw
5453 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5454 Identical to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}, except that @var{name} is known
5455 to refer to a compiler-generated label. The default definition uses
5456 @code{assemble_name_raw}, which is like @code{assemble_name} except
5457 that it is more efficient.
5458 @end defmac
5459
5460 @defmac SIZE_ASM_OP
5461 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5462 size of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5463 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.size\t"}; on other
5464 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5465
5466 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definitions
5467 of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE}
5468 for your system. If you need your own custom definitions of those
5469 macros, or if you do not need explicit symbol sizes at all, do not
5470 define this macro.
5471 @end defmac
5472
5473 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{size})
5474 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5475 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the size of the
5476 symbol @var{name} is @var{size}. @var{size} is a @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}.
5477 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5478 provided.
5479 @end defmac
5480
5481 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5482 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5483 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler to calculate the size of
5484 the symbol @var{name} by subtracting its address from the current
5485 address.
5486
5487 If you define @code{SIZE_ASM_OP}, a default definition of this macro is
5488 provided. The default assumes that the assembler recognizes a special
5489 @samp{.} symbol as referring to the current address, and can calculate
5490 the difference between this and another symbol. If your assembler does
5491 not recognize @samp{.} or cannot do calculations with it, you will need
5492 to redefine @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} to use some other technique.
5493 @end defmac
5494
5495 @defmac NO_DOLLAR_IN_LABEL
5496 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5497 @samp{$} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in
5498 G++ have @samp{$} in the identifiers. If this macro is defined,
5499 @samp{.} is used instead.
5500 @end defmac
5501
5502 @defmac NO_DOT_IN_LABEL
5503 Define this macro if the assembler does not accept the character
5504 @samp{.} in label names. By default constructors and destructors in G++
5505 have names that use @samp{.}. If this macro is defined, these names
5506 are rewritten to avoid @samp{.}.
5507 @end defmac
5508
5509 @defmac TYPE_ASM_OP
5510 A C string containing the appropriate assembler directive to specify the
5511 type of a symbol, without any arguments. On systems that use ELF, the
5512 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"\t.type\t"}; on other
5513 systems, the default is not to define this macro.
5514
5515 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5516 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5517 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5518 types at all, do not define this macro.
5519 @end defmac
5520
5521 @defmac TYPE_OPERAND_FMT
5522 A C string which specifies (using @code{printf} syntax) the format of
5523 the second operand to @code{TYPE_ASM_OP}. On systems that use ELF, the
5524 default (in @file{config/elfos.h}) is @samp{"@@%s"}; on other systems,
5525 the default is not to define this macro.
5526
5527 Define this macro only if it is correct to use the default definition of
5528 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} for your system. If you need your own
5529 custom definition of this macro, or if you do not need explicit symbol
5530 types at all, do not define this macro.
5531 @end defmac
5532
5533 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE (@var{stream}, @var{type})
5534 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5535 @var{stream} a directive telling the assembler that the type of the
5536 symbol @var{name} is @var{type}. @var{type} is a C string; currently,
5537 that string is always either @samp{"function"} or @samp{"object"}, but
5538 you should not count on this.
5539
5540 If you define @code{TYPE_ASM_OP} and @code{TYPE_OPERAND_FMT}, a default
5541 definition of this macro is provided.
5542 @end defmac
5543
5544 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5545 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5546 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of a
5547 function which is being defined. This macro is responsible for
5548 outputting the label definition (perhaps using
5549 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}). The argument @var{decl} is the
5550 @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node representing the function.
5551
5552 If this macro is not defined, then the function name is defined in the
5553 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_FUNCTION_LABEL}).
5554
5555 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition
5556 of this macro.
5557 @end defmac
5558
5559 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_FUNCTION_SIZE (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5560 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5561 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the size of a function
5562 which is being defined. The argument @var{name} is the name of the
5563 function. The argument @var{decl} is the @code{FUNCTION_DECL} tree node
5564 representing the function.
5565
5566 If this macro is not defined, then the function size is not defined.
5567
5568 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition
5569 of this macro.
5570 @end defmac
5571
5572 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_OBJECT_NAME (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{decl})
5573 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5574 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name @var{name} of an
5575 initialized variable which is being defined. This macro must output the
5576 label definition (perhaps using @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}). The argument
5577 @var{decl} is the @code{VAR_DECL} tree node representing the variable.
5578
5579 If this macro is not defined, then the variable name is defined in the
5580 usual manner as a label (by means of @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL}).
5581
5582 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_TYPE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5583 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} in the definition of this macro.
5584 @end defmac
5585
5586 @hook TARGET_ASM_DECLARE_CONSTANT_NAME
5587
5588 @defmac ASM_DECLARE_REGISTER_GLOBAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{regno}, @var{name})
5589 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5590 @var{stream} any text necessary for claiming a register @var{regno}
5591 for a global variable @var{decl} with name @var{name}.
5592
5593 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5594 nothing.
5595 @end defmac
5596
5597 @defmac ASM_FINISH_DECLARE_OBJECT (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{toplevel}, @var{atend})
5598 A C statement (sans semicolon) to finish up declaring a variable name
5599 once the compiler has processed its initializer fully and thus has had a
5600 chance to determine the size of an array when controlled by an
5601 initializer. This is used on systems where it's necessary to declare
5602 something about the size of the object.
5603
5604 If you don't define this macro, that is equivalent to defining it to do
5605 nothing.
5606
5607 You may wish to use @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SIZE_DIRECTIVE} and/or
5608 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_MEASURED_SIZE} in the definition of this macro.
5609 @end defmac
5610
5611 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_LABEL
5612
5613 @hook TARGET_ASM_GLOBALIZE_DECL_NAME
5614
5615 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_UNDEFINED_DECL
5616
5617 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5618 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5619 @var{stream} some commands that will make the label @var{name} weak;
5620 that is, available for reference from other files but only used if
5621 no other definition is available. Use the expression
5622 @code{assemble_name (@var{stream}, @var{name})} to output the name
5623 itself; before and after that, output the additional assembler syntax
5624 for making that name weak, and a newline.
5625
5626 If you don't define this macro or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}, GCC will not
5627 support weak symbols and you should not define the @code{SUPPORTS_WEAK}
5628 macro.
5629 @end defmac
5630
5631 @defmac ASM_WEAKEN_DECL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5632 Combines (and replaces) the function of @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} and
5633 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS}, allowing access to the associated function
5634 or variable decl. If @var{value} is not @code{NULL}, this C statement
5635 should output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code which
5636 defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5637 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it should output commands
5638 to make @var{name} weak.
5639 @end defmac
5640
5641 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAKREF (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5642 Outputs a directive that enables @var{name} to be used to refer to
5643 symbol @var{value} with weak-symbol semantics. @code{decl} is the
5644 declaration of @code{name}.
5645 @end defmac
5646
5647 @defmac SUPPORTS_WEAK
5648 A preprocessor constant expression which evaluates to true if the target
5649 supports weak symbols.
5650
5651 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5652 definition. If either @code{ASM_WEAKEN_LABEL} or @code{ASM_WEAKEN_DECL}
5653 is defined, the default definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}.
5654 @end defmac
5655
5656 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WEAK
5657 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports weak symbols.
5658
5659 If you don't define this macro, @file{defaults.h} provides a default
5660 definition. The default definition is @samp{(SUPPORTS_WEAK)}. Define
5661 this macro if you want to control weak symbol support with a compiler
5662 flag such as @option{-melf}.
5663 @end defmac
5664
5665 @defmac MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY (@var{decl})
5666 A C statement (sans semicolon) to mark @var{decl} to be emitted as a
5667 public symbol such that extra copies in multiple translation units will
5668 be discarded by the linker. Define this macro if your object file
5669 format provides support for this concept, such as the @samp{COMDAT}
5670 section flags in the Microsoft Windows PE/COFF format, and this support
5671 requires changes to @var{decl}, such as putting it in a separate section.
5672 @end defmac
5673
5674 @defmac SUPPORTS_ONE_ONLY
5675 A C expression which evaluates to true if the target supports one-only
5676 semantics.
5677
5678 If you don't define this macro, @file{varasm.c} provides a default
5679 definition. If @code{MAKE_DECL_ONE_ONLY} is defined, the default
5680 definition is @samp{1}; otherwise, it is @samp{0}. Define this macro if
5681 you want to control one-only symbol support with a compiler flag, or if
5682 setting the @code{DECL_ONE_ONLY} flag is enough to mark a declaration to
5683 be emitted as one-only.
5684 @end defmac
5685
5686 @hook TARGET_ASM_ASSEMBLE_VISIBILITY
5687
5688 @defmac TARGET_WEAK_NOT_IN_ARCHIVE_TOC
5689 A C expression that evaluates to true if the target's linker expects
5690 that weak symbols do not appear in a static archive's table of contents.
5691 The default is @code{0}.
5692
5693 Leaving weak symbols out of an archive's table of contents means that,
5694 if a symbol will only have a definition in one translation unit and
5695 will have undefined references from other translation units, that
5696 symbol should not be weak. Defining this macro to be nonzero will
5697 thus have the effect that certain symbols that would normally be weak
5698 (explicit template instantiations, and vtables for polymorphic classes
5699 with noninline key methods) will instead be nonweak.
5700
5701 The C++ ABI requires this macro to be zero. Define this macro for
5702 targets where full C++ ABI compliance is impossible and where linker
5703 restrictions require weak symbols to be left out of a static archive's
5704 table of contents.
5705 @end defmac
5706
5707 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_EXTERNAL (@var{stream}, @var{decl}, @var{name})
5708 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5709 @var{stream} any text necessary for declaring the name of an external
5710 symbol named @var{name} which is referenced in this compilation but
5711 not defined. The value of @var{decl} is the tree node for the
5712 declaration.
5713
5714 This macro need not be defined if it does not need to output anything.
5715 The GNU assembler and most Unix assemblers don't require anything.
5716 @end defmac
5717
5718 @hook TARGET_ASM_EXTERNAL_LIBCALL
5719
5720 @hook TARGET_ASM_MARK_DECL_PRESERVED
5721
5722 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF (@var{stream}, @var{name})
5723 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output to the stdio stream
5724 @var{stream} a reference in assembler syntax to a label named
5725 @var{name}. This should add @samp{_} to the front of the name, if that
5726 is customary on your operating system, as it is in most Berkeley Unix
5727 systems. This macro is used in @code{assemble_name}.
5728 @end defmac
5729
5730 @hook TARGET_MANGLE_ASSEMBLER_NAME
5731
5732 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SYMBOL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{sym})
5733 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to
5734 @code{SYMBOL_REF} @var{sym}. If not defined, @code{assemble_name}
5735 will be used to output the name of the symbol. This macro may be used
5736 to modify the way a symbol is referenced depending on information
5737 encoded by @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO}.
5738 @end defmac
5739
5740 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_LABEL_REF (@var{stream}, @var{buf})
5741 A C statement (sans semicolon) to output a reference to @var{buf}, the
5742 result of @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL}. If not defined,
5743 @code{assemble_name} will be used to output the name of the symbol.
5744 This macro is not used by @code{output_asm_label}, or the @code{%l}
5745 specifier that calls it; the intention is that this macro should be set
5746 when it is necessary to output a label differently when its address is
5747 being taken.
5748 @end defmac
5749
5750 @hook TARGET_ASM_INTERNAL_LABEL
5751
5752 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEBUG_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5753 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} a debug info
5754 label whose name is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number
5755 @var{num}. This is useful for VLIW targets, where debug info labels
5756 may need to be treated differently than branch target labels. On some
5757 systems, branch target labels must be at the beginning of instruction
5758 bundles, but debug info labels can occur in the middle of instruction
5759 bundles.
5760
5761 If this macro is not defined, then @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} will be
5762 used.
5763 @end defmac
5764
5765 @defmac ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL (@var{string}, @var{prefix}, @var{num})
5766 A C statement to store into the string @var{string} a label whose name
5767 is made from the string @var{prefix} and the number @var{num}.
5768
5769 This string, when output subsequently by @code{assemble_name}, should
5770 produce the output that @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)} would produce
5771 with the same @var{prefix} and @var{num}.
5772
5773 If the string begins with @samp{*}, then @code{assemble_name} will
5774 output the rest of the string unchanged. It is often convenient for
5775 @code{ASM_GENERATE_INTERNAL_LABEL} to use @samp{*} in this way. If the
5776 string doesn't start with @samp{*}, then @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} gets
5777 to output the string, and may change it. (Of course,
5778 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} is also part of your machine description, so
5779 you should know what it does on your machine.)
5780 @end defmac
5781
5782 @defmac ASM_FORMAT_PRIVATE_NAME (@var{outvar}, @var{name}, @var{number})
5783 A C expression to assign to @var{outvar} (which is a variable of type
5784 @code{char *}) a newly allocated string made from the string
5785 @var{name} and the number @var{number}, with some suitable punctuation
5786 added. Use @code{alloca} to get space for the string.
5787
5788 The string will be used as an argument to @code{ASM_OUTPUT_LABELREF} to
5789 produce an assembler label for an internal static variable whose name is
5790 @var{name}. Therefore, the string must be such as to result in valid
5791 assembler code. The argument @var{number} is different each time this
5792 macro is executed; it prevents conflicts between similarly-named
5793 internal static variables in different scopes.
5794
5795 Ideally this string should not be a valid C identifier, to prevent any
5796 conflict with the user's own symbols. Most assemblers allow periods
5797 or percent signs in assembler symbols; putting at least one of these
5798 between the name and the number will suffice.
5799
5800 If this macro is not defined, a default definition will be provided
5801 which is correct for most systems.
5802 @end defmac
5803
5804 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5805 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5806 which defines (equates) the symbol @var{name} to have the value @var{value}.
5807
5808 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5809 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5810 correct for most systems.
5811 @end defmac
5812
5813 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS (@var{stream}, @var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5814 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5815 which defines (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name}
5816 to have the value of the tree node @var{decl_of_value}. This macro will
5817 be used in preference to @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} if it is defined and if
5818 the tree nodes are available.
5819
5820 @findex SET_ASM_OP
5821 If @code{SET_ASM_OP} is defined, a default definition is provided which is
5822 correct for most systems.
5823 @end defmac
5824
5825 @defmac TARGET_DEFERRED_OUTPUT_DEFS (@var{decl_of_name}, @var{decl_of_value})
5826 A C statement that evaluates to true if the assembler code which defines
5827 (equates) the symbol whose tree node is @var{decl_of_name} to have the value
5828 of the tree node @var{decl_of_value} should be emitted near the end of the
5829 current compilation unit. The default is to not defer output of defines.
5830 This macro affects defines output by @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} and
5831 @samp{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF_FROM_DECLS}.
5832 @end defmac
5833
5834 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_WEAK_ALIAS (@var{stream}, @var{name}, @var{value})
5835 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} assembler code
5836 which defines (equates) the weak symbol @var{name} to have the value
5837 @var{value}. If @var{value} is @code{NULL}, it defines @var{name} as
5838 an undefined weak symbol.
5839
5840 Define this macro if the target only supports weak aliases; define
5841 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF} instead if possible.
5842 @end defmac
5843
5844 @defmac OBJC_GEN_METHOD_LABEL (@var{buf}, @var{is_inst}, @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name}, @var{sel_name})
5845 Define this macro to override the default assembler names used for
5846 Objective-C methods.
5847
5848 The default name is a unique method number followed by the name of the
5849 class (e.g.@: @samp{_1_Foo}). For methods in categories, the name of
5850 the category is also included in the assembler name (e.g.@:
5851 @samp{_1_Foo_Bar}).
5852
5853 These names are safe on most systems, but make debugging difficult since
5854 the method's selector is not present in the name. Therefore, particular
5855 systems define other ways of computing names.
5856
5857 @var{buf} is an expression of type @code{char *} which gives you a
5858 buffer in which to store the name; its length is as long as
5859 @var{class_name}, @var{cat_name} and @var{sel_name} put together, plus
5860 50 characters extra.
5861
5862 The argument @var{is_inst} specifies whether the method is an instance
5863 method or a class method; @var{class_name} is the name of the class;
5864 @var{cat_name} is the name of the category (or @code{NULL} if the method is not
5865 in a category); and @var{sel_name} is the name of the selector.
5866
5867 On systems where the assembler can handle quoted names, you can use this
5868 macro to provide more human-readable names.
5869 @end defmac
5870
5871 @node Initialization
5872 @subsection How Initialization Functions Are Handled
5873 @cindex initialization routines
5874 @cindex termination routines
5875 @cindex constructors, output of
5876 @cindex destructors, output of
5877
5878 The compiled code for certain languages includes @dfn{constructors}
5879 (also called @dfn{initialization routines})---functions to initialize
5880 data in the program when the program is started. These functions need
5881 to be called before the program is ``started''---that is to say, before
5882 @code{main} is called.
5883
5884 Compiling some languages generates @dfn{destructors} (also called
5885 @dfn{termination routines}) that should be called when the program
5886 terminates.
5887
5888 To make the initialization and termination functions work, the compiler
5889 must output something in the assembler code to cause those functions to
5890 be called at the appropriate time. When you port the compiler to a new
5891 system, you need to specify how to do this.
5892
5893 There are two major ways that GCC currently supports the execution of
5894 initialization and termination functions. Each way has two variants.
5895 Much of the structure is common to all four variations.
5896
5897 @findex __CTOR_LIST__
5898 @findex __DTOR_LIST__
5899 The linker must build two lists of these functions---a list of
5900 initialization functions, called @code{__CTOR_LIST__}, and a list of
5901 termination functions, called @code{__DTOR_LIST__}.
5902
5903 Each list always begins with an ignored function pointer (which may hold
5904 0, @minus{}1, or a count of the function pointers after it, depending on
5905 the environment). This is followed by a series of zero or more function
5906 pointers to constructors (or destructors), followed by a function
5907 pointer containing zero.
5908
5909 Depending on the operating system and its executable file format, either
5910 @file{crtstuff.c} or @file{libgcc2.c} traverses these lists at startup
5911 time and exit time. Constructors are called in reverse order of the
5912 list; destructors in forward order.
5913
5914 The best way to handle static constructors works only for object file
5915 formats which provide arbitrarily-named sections. A section is set
5916 aside for a list of constructors, and another for a list of destructors.
5917 Traditionally these are called @samp{.ctors} and @samp{.dtors}. Each
5918 object file that defines an initialization function also puts a word in
5919 the constructor section to point to that function. The linker
5920 accumulates all these words into one contiguous @samp{.ctors} section.
5921 Termination functions are handled similarly.
5922
5923 This method will be chosen as the default by @file{target-def.h} if
5924 @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is defined. A target that does not
5925 support arbitrary sections, but does support special designated
5926 constructor and destructor sections may define @code{CTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5927 and @code{DTORS_SECTION_ASM_OP} to achieve the same effect.
5928
5929 When arbitrary sections are available, there are two variants, depending
5930 upon how the code in @file{crtstuff.c} is called. On systems that
5931 support a @dfn{.init} section which is executed at program startup,
5932 parts of @file{crtstuff.c} are compiled into that section. The
5933 program is linked by the @command{gcc} driver like this:
5934
5935 @smallexample
5936 ld -o @var{output_file} crti.o crtbegin.o @dots{} -lgcc crtend.o crtn.o
5937 @end smallexample
5938
5939 The prologue of a function (@code{__init}) appears in the @code{.init}
5940 section of @file{crti.o}; the epilogue appears in @file{crtn.o}. Likewise
5941 for the function @code{__fini} in the @dfn{.fini} section. Normally these
5942 files are provided by the operating system or by the GNU C library, but
5943 are provided by GCC for a few targets.
5944
5945 The objects @file{crtbegin.o} and @file{crtend.o} are (for most targets)
5946 compiled from @file{crtstuff.c}. They contain, among other things, code
5947 fragments within the @code{.init} and @code{.fini} sections that branch
5948 to routines in the @code{.text} section. The linker will pull all parts
5949 of a section together, which results in a complete @code{__init} function
5950 that invokes the routines we need at startup.
5951
5952 To use this variant, you must define the @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}
5953 macro properly.
5954
5955 If no init section is available, when GCC compiles any function called
5956 @code{main} (or more accurately, any function designated as a program
5957 entry point by the language front end calling @code{expand_main_function}),
5958 it inserts a procedure call to @code{__main} as the first executable code
5959 after the function prologue. The @code{__main} function is defined
5960 in @file{libgcc2.c} and runs the global constructors.
5961
5962 In file formats that don't support arbitrary sections, there are again
5963 two variants. In the simplest variant, the GNU linker (GNU @code{ld})
5964 and an `a.out' format must be used. In this case,
5965 @code{TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR} is defined to produce a @code{.stabs}
5966 entry of type @samp{N_SETT}, referencing the name @code{__CTOR_LIST__},
5967 and with the address of the void function containing the initialization
5968 code as its value. The GNU linker recognizes this as a request to add
5969 the value to a @dfn{set}; the values are accumulated, and are eventually
5970 placed in the executable as a vector in the format described above, with
5971 a leading (ignored) count and a trailing zero element.
5972 @code{TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR} is handled similarly. Since no init
5973 section is available, the absence of @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP} causes
5974 the compilation of @code{main} to call @code{__main} as above, starting
5975 the initialization process.
5976
5977 The last variant uses neither arbitrary sections nor the GNU linker.
5978 This is preferable when you want to do dynamic linking and when using
5979 file formats which the GNU linker does not support, such as `ECOFF'@. In
5980 this case, @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is false, initialization and
5981 termination functions are recognized simply by their names. This requires
5982 an extra program in the linkage step, called @command{collect2}. This program
5983 pretends to be the linker, for use with GCC; it does its job by running
5984 the ordinary linker, but also arranges to include the vectors of
5985 initialization and termination functions. These functions are called
5986 via @code{__main} as described above. In order to use this method,
5987 @code{use_collect2} must be defined in the target in @file{config.gcc}.
5988
5989 @ifinfo
5990 The following section describes the specific macros that control and
5991 customize the handling of initialization and termination functions.
5992 @end ifinfo
5993
5994 @node Macros for Initialization
5995 @subsection Macros Controlling Initialization Routines
5996
5997 Here are the macros that control how the compiler handles initialization
5998 and termination functions:
5999
6000 @defmac INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP
6001 If defined, a C string constant, including spacing, for the assembler
6002 operation to identify the following data as initialization code. If not
6003 defined, GCC will assume such a section does not exist. When you are
6004 using special sections for initialization and termination functions, this
6005 macro also controls how @file{crtstuff.c} and @file{libgcc2.c} arrange to
6006 run the initialization functions.
6007 @end defmac
6008
6009 @defmac HAS_INIT_SECTION
6010 If defined, @code{main} will not call @code{__main} as described above.
6011 This macro should be defined for systems that control start-up code
6012 on a symbol-by-symbol basis, such as OSF/1, and should not
6013 be defined explicitly for systems that support @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}.
6014 @end defmac
6015
6016 @defmac LD_INIT_SWITCH
6017 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6018 the following symbol is an initialization routine.
6019 @end defmac
6020
6021 @defmac LD_FINI_SWITCH
6022 If defined, a C string constant for a switch that tells the linker that
6023 the following symbol is a finalization routine.
6024 @end defmac
6025
6026 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_INIT_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6027 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6028 automatically called when a shared library is loaded. The function
6029 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6030 the object format requires an explicit initialization function, then a
6031 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DI} will be generated.
6032
6033 This function and the following one are used by collect2 when linking a
6034 shared library that needs constructors or destructors, or has DWARF2
6035 exception tables embedded in the code.
6036 @end defmac
6037
6038 @defmac COLLECT_SHARED_FINI_FUNC (@var{stream}, @var{func})
6039 If defined, a C statement that will write a function that can be
6040 automatically called when a shared library is unloaded. The function
6041 should call @var{func}, which takes no arguments. If not defined, and
6042 the object format requires an explicit finalization function, then a
6043 function called @code{_GLOBAL__DD} will be generated.
6044 @end defmac
6045
6046 @defmac INVOKE__main
6047 If defined, @code{main} will call @code{__main} despite the presence of
6048 @code{INIT_SECTION_ASM_OP}. This macro should be defined for systems
6049 where the init section is not actually run automatically, but is still
6050 useful for collecting the lists of constructors and destructors.
6051 @end defmac
6052
6053 @defmac SUPPORTS_INIT_PRIORITY
6054 If nonzero, the C++ @code{init_priority} attribute is supported and the
6055 compiler should emit instructions to control the order of initialization
6056 of objects. If zero, the compiler will issue an error message upon
6057 encountering an @code{init_priority} attribute.
6058 @end defmac
6059
6060 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS
6061
6062 @hook TARGET_ASM_CONSTRUCTOR
6063
6064 @hook TARGET_ASM_DESTRUCTOR
6065
6066 If @code{TARGET_HAVE_CTORS_DTORS} is true, the initialization routine
6067 generated for the generated object file will have static linkage.
6068
6069 If your system uses @command{collect2} as the means of processing
6070 constructors, then that program normally uses @command{nm} to scan
6071 an object file for constructor functions to be called.
6072
6073 On certain kinds of systems, you can define this macro to make
6074 @command{collect2} work faster (and, in some cases, make it work at all):
6075
6076 @defmac OBJECT_FORMAT_COFF
6077 Define this macro if the system uses COFF (Common Object File Format)
6078 object files, so that @command{collect2} can assume this format and scan
6079 object files directly for dynamic constructor/destructor functions.
6080
6081 This macro is effective only in a native compiler; @command{collect2} as
6082 part of a cross compiler always uses @command{nm} for the target machine.
6083 @end defmac
6084
6085 @defmac REAL_NM_FILE_NAME
6086 Define this macro as a C string constant containing the file name to use
6087 to execute @command{nm}. The default is to search the path normally for
6088 @command{nm}.
6089 @end defmac
6090
6091 @defmac NM_FLAGS
6092 @command{collect2} calls @command{nm} to scan object files for static
6093 constructors and destructors and LTO info. By default, @option{-n} is
6094 passed. Define @code{NM_FLAGS} to a C string constant if other options
6095 are needed to get the same output format as GNU @command{nm -n}
6096 produces.
6097 @end defmac
6098
6099 If your system supports shared libraries and has a program to list the
6100 dynamic dependencies of a given library or executable, you can define
6101 these macros to enable support for running initialization and
6102 termination functions in shared libraries:
6103
6104 @defmac LDD_SUFFIX
6105 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the name of the program
6106 which lists dynamic dependencies, like @command{ldd} under SunOS 4.
6107 @end defmac
6108
6109 @defmac PARSE_LDD_OUTPUT (@var{ptr})
6110 Define this macro to be C code that extracts filenames from the output
6111 of the program denoted by @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. @var{ptr} is a variable
6112 of type @code{char *} that points to the beginning of a line of output
6113 from @code{LDD_SUFFIX}. If the line lists a dynamic dependency, the
6114 code must advance @var{ptr} to the beginning of the filename on that
6115 line. Otherwise, it must set @var{ptr} to @code{NULL}.
6116 @end defmac
6117
6118 @defmac SHLIB_SUFFIX
6119 Define this macro to a C string constant containing the default shared
6120 library extension of the target (e.g., @samp{".so"}). @command{collect2}
6121 strips version information after this suffix when generating global
6122 constructor and destructor names. This define is only needed on targets
6123 that use @command{collect2} to process constructors and destructors.
6124 @end defmac
6125
6126 @node Instruction Output
6127 @subsection Output of Assembler Instructions
6128
6129 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6130 This describes assembler instruction output.
6131
6132 @defmac REGISTER_NAMES
6133 A C initializer containing the assembler's names for the machine
6134 registers, each one as a C string constant. This is what translates
6135 register numbers in the compiler into assembler language.
6136 @end defmac
6137
6138 @defmac ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES
6139 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a name
6140 and a register number. This macro defines additional names for hard
6141 registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in declarations to refer
6142 to registers using alternate names.
6143 @end defmac
6144
6145 @defmac OVERLAPPING_REGISTER_NAMES
6146 If defined, a C initializer for an array of structures containing a
6147 name, a register number and a count of the number of consecutive
6148 machine registers the name overlaps. This macro defines additional
6149 names for hard registers, thus allowing the @code{asm} option in
6150 declarations to refer to registers using alternate names. Unlike
6151 @code{ADDITIONAL_REGISTER_NAMES}, this macro should be used when the
6152 register name implies multiple underlying registers.
6153
6154 This macro should be used when it is important that a clobber in an
6155 @code{asm} statement clobbers all the underlying values implied by the
6156 register name. For example, on ARM, clobbering the double-precision
6157 VFP register ``d0'' implies clobbering both single-precision registers
6158 ``s0'' and ``s1''.
6159 @end defmac
6160
6161 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_OPCODE (@var{stream}, @var{ptr})
6162 Define this macro if you are using an unusual assembler that
6163 requires different names for the machine instructions.
6164
6165 The definition is a C statement or statements which output an
6166 assembler instruction opcode to the stdio stream @var{stream}. The
6167 macro-operand @var{ptr} is a variable of type @code{char *} which
6168 points to the opcode name in its ``internal'' form---the form that is
6169 written in the machine description. The definition should output the
6170 opcode name to @var{stream}, performing any translation you desire, and
6171 increment the variable @var{ptr} to point at the end of the opcode
6172 so that it will not be output twice.
6173
6174 In fact, your macro definition may process less than the entire opcode
6175 name, or more than the opcode name; but if you want to process text
6176 that includes @samp{%}-sequences to substitute operands, you must take
6177 care of the substitution yourself. Just be sure to increment
6178 @var{ptr} over whatever text should not be output normally.
6179
6180 @findex recog_data.operand
6181 If you need to look at the operand values, they can be found as the
6182 elements of @code{recog_data.operand}.
6183
6184 If the macro definition does nothing, the instruction is output
6185 in the usual way.
6186 @end defmac
6187
6188 @defmac FINAL_PRESCAN_INSN (@var{insn}, @var{opvec}, @var{noperands})
6189 If defined, a C statement to be executed just prior to the output of
6190 assembler code for @var{insn}, to modify the extracted operands so
6191 they will be output differently.
6192
6193 Here the argument @var{opvec} is the vector containing the operands
6194 extracted from @var{insn}, and @var{noperands} is the number of
6195 elements of the vector which contain meaningful data for this insn.
6196 The contents of this vector are what will be used to convert the insn
6197 template into assembler code, so you can change the assembler output
6198 by changing the contents of the vector.
6199
6200 This macro is useful when various assembler syntaxes share a single
6201 file of instruction patterns; by defining this macro differently, you
6202 can cause a large class of instructions to be output differently (such
6203 as with rearranged operands). Naturally, variations in assembler
6204 syntax affecting individual insn patterns ought to be handled by
6205 writing conditional output routines in those patterns.
6206
6207 If this macro is not defined, it is equivalent to a null statement.
6208 @end defmac
6209
6210 @hook TARGET_ASM_FINAL_POSTSCAN_INSN
6211
6212 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND (@var{stream}, @var{x}, @var{code})
6213 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6214 assembler syntax for an instruction operand @var{x}. @var{x} is an
6215 RTL expression.
6216
6217 @var{code} is a value that can be used to specify one of several ways
6218 of printing the operand. It is used when identical operands must be
6219 printed differently depending on the context. @var{code} comes from
6220 the @samp{%} specification that was used to request printing of the
6221 operand. If the specification was just @samp{%@var{digit}} then
6222 @var{code} is 0; if the specification was @samp{%@var{ltr}
6223 @var{digit}} then @var{code} is the ASCII code for @var{ltr}.
6224
6225 @findex reg_names
6226 If @var{x} is a register, this macro should print the register's name.
6227 The names can be found in an array @code{reg_names} whose type is
6228 @code{char *[]}. @code{reg_names} is initialized from
6229 @code{REGISTER_NAMES}.
6230
6231 When the machine description has a specification @samp{%@var{punct}}
6232 (a @samp{%} followed by a punctuation character), this macro is called
6233 with a null pointer for @var{x} and the punctuation character for
6234 @var{code}.
6235 @end defmac
6236
6237 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P (@var{code})
6238 A C expression which evaluates to true if @var{code} is a valid
6239 punctuation character for use in the @code{PRINT_OPERAND} macro. If
6240 @code{PRINT_OPERAND_PUNCT_VALID_P} is not defined, it means that no
6241 punctuation characters (except for the standard one, @samp{%}) are used
6242 in this way.
6243 @end defmac
6244
6245 @defmac PRINT_OPERAND_ADDRESS (@var{stream}, @var{x})
6246 A C compound statement to output to stdio stream @var{stream} the
6247 assembler syntax for an instruction operand that is a memory reference
6248 whose address is @var{x}. @var{x} is an RTL expression.
6249
6250 @cindex @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} usage
6251 On some machines, the syntax for a symbolic address depends on the
6252 section that the address refers to. On these machines, define the hook
6253 @code{TARGET_ENCODE_SECTION_INFO} to store the information into the
6254 @code{symbol_ref}, and then check for it here. @xref{Assembler
6255 Format}.
6256 @end defmac
6257
6258 @findex dbr_sequence_length
6259 @defmac DBR_OUTPUT_SEQEND (@var{file})
6260 A C statement, to be executed after all slot-filler instructions have
6261 been output. If necessary, call @code{dbr_sequence_length} to
6262 determine the number of slots filled in a sequence (zero if not
6263 currently outputting a sequence), to decide how many no-ops to output,
6264 or whatever.
6265
6266 Don't define this macro if it has nothing to do, but it is helpful in
6267 reading assembly output if the extent of the delay sequence is made
6268 explicit (e.g.@: with white space).
6269 @end defmac
6270
6271 @findex final_sequence
6272 Note that output routines for instructions with delay slots must be
6273 prepared to deal with not being output as part of a sequence
6274 (i.e.@: when the scheduling pass is not run, or when no slot fillers could be
6275 found.) The variable @code{final_sequence} is null when not
6276 processing a sequence, otherwise it contains the @code{sequence} rtx
6277 being output.
6278
6279 @findex asm_fprintf
6280 @defmac REGISTER_PREFIX
6281 @defmacx LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX
6282 @defmacx USER_LABEL_PREFIX
6283 @defmacx IMMEDIATE_PREFIX
6284 If defined, C string expressions to be used for the @samp{%R}, @samp{%L},
6285 @samp{%U}, and @samp{%I} options of @code{asm_fprintf} (see
6286 @file{final.c}). These are useful when a single @file{md} file must
6287 support multiple assembler formats. In that case, the various @file{tm.h}
6288 files can define these macros differently.
6289 @end defmac
6290
6291 @defmac ASM_FPRINTF_EXTENSIONS (@var{file}, @var{argptr}, @var{format})
6292 If defined this macro should expand to a series of @code{case}
6293 statements which will be parsed inside the @code{switch} statement of
6294 the @code{asm_fprintf} function. This allows targets to define extra
6295 printf formats which may useful when generating their assembler
6296 statements. Note that uppercase letters are reserved for future
6297 generic extensions to asm_fprintf, and so are not available to target
6298 specific code. The output file is given by the parameter @var{file}.
6299 The varargs input pointer is @var{argptr} and the rest of the format
6300 string, starting the character after the one that is being switched
6301 upon, is pointed to by @var{format}.
6302 @end defmac
6303
6304 @defmac ASSEMBLER_DIALECT
6305 If your target supports multiple dialects of assembler language (such as
6306 different opcodes), define this macro as a C expression that gives the
6307 numeric index of the assembler language dialect to use, with zero as the
6308 first variant.
6309
6310 If this macro is defined, you may use constructs of the form
6311 @smallexample
6312 @samp{@{option0|option1|option2@dots{}@}}
6313 @end smallexample
6314 @noindent
6315 in the output templates of patterns (@pxref{Output Template}) or in the
6316 first argument of @code{asm_fprintf}. This construct outputs
6317 @samp{option0}, @samp{option1}, @samp{option2}, etc., if the value of
6318 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} is zero, one, two, etc. Any special characters
6319 within these strings retain their usual meaning. If there are fewer
6320 alternatives within the braces than the value of
6321 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT}, the construct outputs nothing. If it's needed
6322 to print curly braces or @samp{|} character in assembler output directly,
6323 @samp{%@{}, @samp{%@}} and @samp{%|} can be used.
6324
6325 If you do not define this macro, the characters @samp{@{}, @samp{|} and
6326 @samp{@}} do not have any special meaning when used in templates or
6327 operands to @code{asm_fprintf}.
6328
6329 Define the macros @code{REGISTER_PREFIX}, @code{LOCAL_LABEL_PREFIX},
6330 @code{USER_LABEL_PREFIX} and @code{IMMEDIATE_PREFIX} if you can express
6331 the variations in assembler language syntax with that mechanism. Define
6332 @code{ASSEMBLER_DIALECT} and use the @samp{@{option0|option1@}} syntax
6333 if the syntax variant are larger and involve such things as different
6334 opcodes or operand order.
6335 @end defmac
6336
6337 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_PUSH (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6338 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6339 which will push hard register number @var{regno} onto the stack.
6340 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6341 profiling.
6342 @end defmac
6343
6344 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_REG_POP (@var{stream}, @var{regno})
6345 A C expression to output to @var{stream} some assembler code
6346 which will pop hard register number @var{regno} off of the stack.
6347 The code need not be optimal, since this macro is used only when
6348 profiling.
6349 @end defmac
6350
6351 @node Dispatch Tables
6352 @subsection Output of Dispatch Tables
6353
6354 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6355 This concerns dispatch tables.
6356
6357 @cindex dispatch table
6358 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_DIFF_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{body}, @var{value}, @var{rel})
6359 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6360 pseudo-instruction to generate a difference between two labels.
6361 @var{value} and @var{rel} are the numbers of two internal labels. The
6362 definitions of these labels are output using
6363 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}, and they must be printed in the same
6364 way here. For example,
6365
6366 @smallexample
6367 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d-L%d\n",
6368 @var{value}, @var{rel})
6369 @end smallexample
6370
6371 You must provide this macro on machines where the addresses in a
6372 dispatch table are relative to the table's own address. If defined, GCC
6373 will also use this macro on all machines when producing PIC@.
6374 @var{body} is the body of the @code{ADDR_DIFF_VEC}; it is provided so that the
6375 mode and flags can be read.
6376 @end defmac
6377
6378 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ADDR_VEC_ELT (@var{stream}, @var{value})
6379 This macro should be provided on machines where the addresses
6380 in a dispatch table are absolute.
6381
6382 The definition should be a C statement to output to the stdio stream
6383 @var{stream} an assembler pseudo-instruction to generate a reference to
6384 a label. @var{value} is the number of an internal label whose
6385 definition is output using @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6386 For example,
6387
6388 @smallexample
6389 fprintf (@var{stream}, "\t.word L%d\n", @var{value})
6390 @end smallexample
6391 @end defmac
6392
6393 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_LABEL (@var{stream}, @var{prefix}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6394 Define this if the label before a jump-table needs to be output
6395 specially. The first three arguments are the same as for
6396 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}; the fourth argument is the
6397 jump-table which follows (a @code{jump_table_data} containing an
6398 @code{addr_vec} or @code{addr_diff_vec}).
6399
6400 This feature is used on system V to output a @code{swbeg} statement
6401 for the table.
6402
6403 If this macro is not defined, these labels are output with
6404 @code{(*targetm.asm_out.internal_label)}.
6405 @end defmac
6406
6407 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_CASE_END (@var{stream}, @var{num}, @var{table})
6408 Define this if something special must be output at the end of a
6409 jump-table. The definition should be a C statement to be executed
6410 after the assembler code for the table is written. It should write
6411 the appropriate code to stdio stream @var{stream}. The argument
6412 @var{table} is the jump-table insn, and @var{num} is the label-number
6413 of the preceding label.
6414
6415 If this macro is not defined, nothing special is output at the end of
6416 the jump-table.
6417 @end defmac
6418
6419 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_UNWIND_LABEL
6420
6421 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_TABLE_LABEL
6422
6423 @hook TARGET_ASM_EMIT_EXCEPT_PERSONALITY
6424
6425 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT
6426
6427 @hook TARGET_ASM_UNWIND_EMIT_BEFORE_INSN
6428
6429 @node Exception Region Output
6430 @subsection Assembler Commands for Exception Regions
6431
6432 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6433
6434 This describes commands marking the start and the end of an exception
6435 region.
6436
6437 @defmac EH_FRAME_SECTION_NAME
6438 If defined, a C string constant for the name of the section containing
6439 exception handling frame unwind information. If not defined, GCC will
6440 provide a default definition if the target supports named sections.
6441 @file{crtstuff.c} uses this macro to switch to the appropriate section.
6442
6443 You should define this symbol if your target supports DWARF 2 frame
6444 unwind information and the default definition does not work.
6445 @end defmac
6446
6447 @defmac EH_FRAME_IN_DATA_SECTION
6448 If defined, DWARF 2 frame unwind information will be placed in the
6449 data section even though the target supports named sections. This
6450 might be necessary, for instance, if the system linker does garbage
6451 collection and sections cannot be marked as not to be collected.
6452
6453 Do not define this macro unless @code{TARGET_ASM_NAMED_SECTION} is
6454 also defined.
6455 @end defmac
6456
6457 @defmac EH_TABLES_CAN_BE_READ_ONLY
6458 Define this macro to 1 if your target is such that no frame unwind
6459 information encoding used with non-PIC code will ever require a
6460 runtime relocation, but the linker may not support merging read-only
6461 and read-write sections into a single read-write section.
6462 @end defmac
6463
6464 @defmac MASK_RETURN_ADDR
6465 An rtx used to mask the return address found via @code{RETURN_ADDR_RTX}, so
6466 that it does not contain any extraneous set bits in it.
6467 @end defmac
6468
6469 @defmac DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO
6470 Define this macro to 0 if your target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6471 information, but it does not yet work with exception handling.
6472 Otherwise, if your target supports this information (if it defines
6473 @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and @code{OBJECT_FORMAT_ELF}),
6474 GCC will provide a default definition of 1.
6475 @end defmac
6476
6477 @hook TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO
6478 This hook defines the mechanism that will be used for exception handling
6479 by the target. If the target has ABI specified unwind tables, the hook
6480 should return @code{UI_TARGET}. If the target is to use the
6481 @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling scheme, the hook
6482 should return @code{UI_SJLJ}. If the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind
6483 information, the hook should return @code{UI_DWARF2}.
6484
6485 A target may, if exceptions are disabled, choose to return @code{UI_NONE}.
6486 This may end up simplifying other parts of target-specific code. The
6487 default implementation of this hook never returns @code{UI_NONE}.
6488
6489 Note that the value returned by this hook should be constant. It should
6490 not depend on anything except the command-line switches described by
6491 @var{opts}. In particular, the
6492 setting @code{UI_SJLJ} must be fixed at compiler start-up as C pre-processor
6493 macros and builtin functions related to exception handling are set up
6494 depending on this setting.
6495
6496 The default implementation of the hook first honors the
6497 @option{--enable-sjlj-exceptions} configure option, then
6498 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO}, and finally defaults to @code{UI_SJLJ}. If
6499 @code{DWARF2_UNWIND_INFO} depends on command-line options, the target
6500 must define this hook so that @var{opts} is used correctly.
6501 @end deftypefn
6502
6503 @hook TARGET_UNWIND_TABLES_DEFAULT
6504 This variable should be set to @code{true} if the target ABI requires unwinding
6505 tables even when exceptions are not used. It must not be modified by
6506 command-line option processing.
6507 @end deftypevr
6508
6509 @defmac DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP
6510 Define this macro to 1 if the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based scheme
6511 should use the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp} functions from the C library
6512 instead of the @code{__builtin_setjmp}/@code{__builtin_longjmp} machinery.
6513 @end defmac
6514
6515 @defmac JMP_BUF_SIZE
6516 This macro has no effect unless @code{DONT_USE_BUILTIN_SETJMP} is also
6517 defined. Define this macro if the default size of @code{jmp_buf} buffer
6518 for the @code{setjmp}/@code{longjmp}-based exception handling mechanism
6519 is not large enough, or if it is much too large.
6520 The default size is @code{FIRST_PSEUDO_REGISTER * sizeof(void *)}.
6521 @end defmac
6522
6523 @defmac DWARF_CIE_DATA_ALIGNMENT
6524 This macro need only be defined if the target might save registers in the
6525 function prologue at an offset to the stack pointer that is not aligned to
6526 @code{UNITS_PER_WORD}. The definition should be the negative minimum
6527 alignment if @code{STACK_GROWS_DOWNWARD} is defined, and the positive
6528 minimum alignment otherwise. @xref{SDB and DWARF}. Only applicable if
6529 the target supports DWARF 2 frame unwind information.
6530 @end defmac
6531
6532 @hook TARGET_TERMINATE_DW2_EH_FRAME_INFO
6533
6534 @hook TARGET_DWARF_REGISTER_SPAN
6535
6536 @hook TARGET_DWARF_FRAME_REG_MODE
6537
6538 @hook TARGET_INIT_DWARF_REG_SIZES_EXTRA
6539
6540 @hook TARGET_ASM_TTYPE
6541
6542 @hook TARGET_ARM_EABI_UNWINDER
6543
6544 @node Alignment Output
6545 @subsection Assembler Commands for Alignment
6546
6547 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6548 This describes commands for alignment.
6549
6550 @defmac JUMP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6551 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which is
6552 a common destination of jumps and has no fallthru incoming edge.
6553
6554 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6555 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6556 define the macro.
6557
6558 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6559 to set the variable @var{align_jumps} in the target's
6560 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6561 selection in @var{align_jumps} in a @code{JUMP_ALIGN} implementation.
6562 @end defmac
6563
6564 @hook TARGET_ASM_JUMP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6565
6566 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER (@var{label})
6567 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}, which follows
6568 a @code{BARRIER}.
6569
6570 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6571 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6572 define the macro.
6573 @end defmac
6574
6575 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER_MAX_SKIP
6576
6577 @defmac LOOP_ALIGN (@var{label})
6578 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label} that heads
6579 a frequently executed basic block (usually the header of a loop).
6580
6581 This macro need not be defined if you don't want any special alignment
6582 to be done at such a time. Most machine descriptions do not currently
6583 define the macro.
6584
6585 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6586 to set the variable @code{align_loops} in the target's
6587 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6588 selection in @code{align_loops} in a @code{LOOP_ALIGN} implementation.
6589 @end defmac
6590
6591 @hook TARGET_ASM_LOOP_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6592
6593 @defmac LABEL_ALIGN (@var{label})
6594 The alignment (log base 2) to put in front of @var{label}.
6595 If @code{LABEL_ALIGN_AFTER_BARRIER} / @code{LOOP_ALIGN} specify a different alignment,
6596 the maximum of the specified values is used.
6597
6598 Unless it's necessary to inspect the @var{label} parameter, it is better
6599 to set the variable @code{align_labels} in the target's
6600 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}. Otherwise, you should try to honor the user's
6601 selection in @code{align_labels} in a @code{LABEL_ALIGN} implementation.
6602 @end defmac
6603
6604 @hook TARGET_ASM_LABEL_ALIGN_MAX_SKIP
6605
6606 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP (@var{stream}, @var{nbytes})
6607 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6608 instruction to advance the location counter by @var{nbytes} bytes.
6609 Those bytes should be zero when loaded. @var{nbytes} will be a C
6610 expression of type @code{unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT}.
6611 @end defmac
6612
6613 @defmac ASM_NO_SKIP_IN_TEXT
6614 Define this macro if @code{ASM_OUTPUT_SKIP} should not be used in the
6615 text section because it fails to put zeros in the bytes that are skipped.
6616 This is true on many Unix systems, where the pseudo--op to skip bytes
6617 produces no-op instructions rather than zeros when used in the text
6618 section.
6619 @end defmac
6620
6621 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6622 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6623 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6624 @var{power} bytes. @var{power} will be a C expression of type @code{int}.
6625 @end defmac
6626
6627 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN_WITH_NOP (@var{stream}, @var{power})
6628 Like @code{ASM_OUTPUT_ALIGN}, except that the ``nop'' instruction is used
6629 for padding, if necessary.
6630 @end defmac
6631
6632 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_MAX_SKIP_ALIGN (@var{stream}, @var{power}, @var{max_skip})
6633 A C statement to output to the stdio stream @var{stream} an assembler
6634 command to advance the location counter to a multiple of 2 to the
6635 @var{power} bytes, but only if @var{max_skip} or fewer bytes are needed to
6636 satisfy the alignment request. @var{power} and @var{max_skip} will be
6637 a C expression of type @code{int}.
6638 @end defmac
6639
6640 @need 3000
6641 @node Debugging Info
6642 @section Controlling Debugging Information Format
6643
6644 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6645 This describes how to specify debugging information.
6646
6647 @menu
6648 * All Debuggers:: Macros that affect all debugging formats uniformly.
6649 * DBX Options:: Macros enabling specific options in DBX format.
6650 * DBX Hooks:: Hook macros for varying DBX format.
6651 * File Names and DBX:: Macros controlling output of file names in DBX format.
6652 * SDB and DWARF:: Macros for SDB (COFF) and DWARF formats.
6653 * VMS Debug:: Macros for VMS debug format.
6654 @end menu
6655
6656 @node All Debuggers
6657 @subsection Macros Affecting All Debugging Formats
6658
6659 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6660 These macros affect all debugging formats.
6661
6662 @defmac DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER (@var{regno})
6663 A C expression that returns the DBX register number for the compiler
6664 register number @var{regno}. In the default macro provided, the value
6665 of this expression will be @var{regno} itself. But sometimes there are
6666 some registers that the compiler knows about and DBX does not, or vice
6667 versa. In such cases, some register may need to have one number in the
6668 compiler and another for DBX@.
6669
6670 If two registers have consecutive numbers inside GCC, and they can be
6671 used as a pair to hold a multiword value, then they @emph{must} have
6672 consecutive numbers after renumbering with @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER}.
6673 Otherwise, debuggers will be unable to access such a pair, because they
6674 expect register pairs to be consecutive in their own numbering scheme.
6675
6676 If you find yourself defining @code{DBX_REGISTER_NUMBER} in way that
6677 does not preserve register pairs, then what you must do instead is
6678 redefine the actual register numbering scheme.
6679 @end defmac
6680
6681 @defmac DEBUGGER_AUTO_OFFSET (@var{x})
6682 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an automatic
6683 variable having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The default
6684 computation assumes that @var{x} is based on the frame-pointer and
6685 gives the offset from the frame-pointer. This is required for targets
6686 that produce debugging output for DBX or COFF-style debugging output
6687 for SDB and allow the frame-pointer to be eliminated when the
6688 @option{-g} options is used.
6689 @end defmac
6690
6691 @defmac DEBUGGER_ARG_OFFSET (@var{offset}, @var{x})
6692 A C expression that returns the integer offset value for an argument
6693 having address @var{x} (an RTL expression). The nominal offset is
6694 @var{offset}.
6695 @end defmac
6696
6697 @defmac PREFERRED_DEBUGGING_TYPE
6698 A C expression that returns the type of debugging output GCC should
6699 produce when the user specifies just @option{-g}. Define
6700 this if you have arranged for GCC to support more than one format of
6701 debugging output. Currently, the allowable values are @code{DBX_DEBUG},
6702 @code{SDB_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF_DEBUG}, @code{DWARF2_DEBUG},
6703 @code{XCOFF_DEBUG}, @code{VMS_DEBUG}, and @code{VMS_AND_DWARF2_DEBUG}.
6704
6705 When the user specifies @option{-ggdb}, GCC normally also uses the
6706 value of this macro to select the debugging output format, but with two
6707 exceptions. If @code{DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO} is defined, GCC uses the
6708 value @code{DWARF2_DEBUG}. Otherwise, if @code{DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO} is
6709 defined, GCC uses @code{DBX_DEBUG}.
6710
6711 The value of this macro only affects the default debugging output; the
6712 user can always get a specific type of output by using @option{-gstabs},
6713 @option{-gcoff}, @option{-gdwarf-2}, @option{-gxcoff}, or @option{-gvms}.
6714 @end defmac
6715
6716 @node DBX Options
6717 @subsection Specific Options for DBX Output
6718
6719 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6720 These are specific options for DBX output.
6721
6722 @defmac DBX_DEBUGGING_INFO
6723 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for DBX
6724 in response to the @option{-g} option.
6725 @end defmac
6726
6727 @defmac XCOFF_DEBUGGING_INFO
6728 Define this macro if GCC should produce XCOFF format debugging output
6729 in response to the @option{-g} option. This is a variant of DBX format.
6730 @end defmac
6731
6732 @defmac DEFAULT_GDB_EXTENSIONS
6733 Define this macro to control whether GCC should by default generate
6734 GDB's extended version of DBX debugging information (assuming DBX-format
6735 debugging information is enabled at all). If you don't define the
6736 macro, the default is 1: always generate the extended information
6737 if there is any occasion to.
6738 @end defmac
6739
6740 @defmac DEBUG_SYMS_TEXT
6741 Define this macro if all @code{.stabs} commands should be output while
6742 in the text section.
6743 @end defmac
6744
6745 @defmac ASM_STABS_OP
6746 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6747 use instead of @code{"\t.stabs\t"} to define an ordinary debugging symbol.
6748 If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabs\t"} is used. This macro
6749 applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6750 @end defmac
6751
6752 @defmac ASM_STABD_OP
6753 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6754 use instead of @code{"\t.stabd\t"} to define a debugging symbol whose
6755 value is the current location. If you don't define this macro,
6756 @code{"\t.stabd\t"} is used. This macro applies only to DBX debugging
6757 information format.
6758 @end defmac
6759
6760 @defmac ASM_STABN_OP
6761 A C string constant, including spacing, naming the assembler pseudo op to
6762 use instead of @code{"\t.stabn\t"} to define a debugging symbol with no
6763 name. If you don't define this macro, @code{"\t.stabn\t"} is used. This
6764 macro applies only to DBX debugging information format.
6765 @end defmac
6766
6767 @defmac DBX_NO_XREFS
6768 Define this macro if DBX on your system does not support the construct
6769 @samp{xs@var{tagname}}. On some systems, this construct is used to
6770 describe a forward reference to a structure named @var{tagname}.
6771 On other systems, this construct is not supported at all.
6772 @end defmac
6773
6774 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_LENGTH
6775 A symbol name in DBX-format debugging information is normally
6776 continued (split into two separate @code{.stabs} directives) when it
6777 exceeds a certain length (by default, 80 characters). On some
6778 operating systems, DBX requires this splitting; on others, splitting
6779 must not be done. You can inhibit splitting by defining this macro
6780 with the value zero. You can override the default splitting-length by
6781 defining this macro as an expression for the length you desire.
6782 @end defmac
6783
6784 @defmac DBX_CONTIN_CHAR
6785 Normally continuation is indicated by adding a @samp{\} character to
6786 the end of a @code{.stabs} string when a continuation follows. To use
6787 a different character instead, define this macro as a character
6788 constant for the character you want to use. Do not define this macro
6789 if backslash is correct for your system.
6790 @end defmac
6791
6792 @defmac DBX_STATIC_STAB_DATA_SECTION
6793 Define this macro if it is necessary to go to the data section before
6794 outputting the @samp{.stabs} pseudo-op for a non-global static
6795 variable.
6796 @end defmac
6797
6798 @defmac DBX_TYPE_DECL_STABS_CODE
6799 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6800 for a typedef. The default is @code{N_LSYM}.
6801 @end defmac
6802
6803 @defmac DBX_STATIC_CONST_VAR_CODE
6804 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6805 for a static variable located in the text section. DBX format does not
6806 provide any ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_FUN}.
6807 @end defmac
6808
6809 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_CODE
6810 The value to use in the ``code'' field of the @code{.stabs} directive
6811 for a parameter passed in registers. DBX format does not provide any
6812 ``right'' way to do this. The default is @code{N_RSYM}.
6813 @end defmac
6814
6815 @defmac DBX_REGPARM_STABS_LETTER
6816 The letter to use in DBX symbol data to identify a symbol as a parameter
6817 passed in registers. DBX format does not customarily provide any way to
6818 do this. The default is @code{'P'}.
6819 @end defmac
6820
6821 @defmac DBX_FUNCTION_FIRST
6822 Define this macro if the DBX information for a function and its
6823 arguments should precede the assembler code for the function. Normally,
6824 in DBX format, the debugging information entirely follows the assembler
6825 code.
6826 @end defmac
6827
6828 @defmac DBX_BLOCKS_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6829 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol describing
6830 the scope of a block (@code{N_LBRAC} or @code{N_RBRAC}) should be
6831 relative to the start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses
6832 an absolute address.
6833 @end defmac
6834
6835 @defmac DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE
6836 Define this macro, with value 1, if the value of a symbol indicating
6837 the current line number (@code{N_SLINE}) should be relative to the
6838 start of the enclosing function. Normally, GCC uses an absolute address.
6839 @end defmac
6840
6841 @defmac DBX_USE_BINCL
6842 Define this macro if GCC should generate @code{N_BINCL} and
6843 @code{N_EINCL} stabs for included header files, as on Sun systems. This
6844 macro also directs GCC to output a type number as a pair of a file
6845 number and a type number within the file. Normally, GCC does not
6846 generate @code{N_BINCL} or @code{N_EINCL} stabs, and it outputs a single
6847 number for a type number.
6848 @end defmac
6849
6850 @node DBX Hooks
6851 @subsection Open-Ended Hooks for DBX Format
6852
6853 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6854 These are hooks for DBX format.
6855
6856 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line}, @var{counter})
6857 A C statement to output DBX debugging information before code for line
6858 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
6859 @var{stream}. @var{counter} is the number of time the macro was
6860 invoked, including the current invocation; it is intended to generate
6861 unique labels in the assembly output.
6862
6863 This macro should not be defined if the default output is correct, or
6864 if it can be made correct by defining @code{DBX_LINES_FUNCTION_RELATIVE}.
6865 @end defmac
6866
6867 @defmac NO_DBX_FUNCTION_END
6868 Some stabs encapsulation formats (in particular ECOFF), cannot handle the
6869 @code{.stabs "",N_FUN,,0,0,Lscope-function-1} gdb dbx extension construct.
6870 On those machines, define this macro to turn this feature off without
6871 disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6872 @end defmac
6873
6874 @defmac NO_DBX_BNSYM_ENSYM
6875 Some assemblers cannot handle the @code{.stabd BNSYM/ENSYM,0,0} gdb dbx
6876 extension construct. On those machines, define this macro to turn this
6877 feature off without disturbing the rest of the gdb extensions.
6878 @end defmac
6879
6880 @node File Names and DBX
6881 @subsection File Names in DBX Format
6882
6883 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6884 This describes file names in DBX format.
6885
6886 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILENAME (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6887 A C statement to output DBX debugging information to the stdio stream
6888 @var{stream}, which indicates that file @var{name} is the main source
6889 file---the file specified as the input file for compilation.
6890 This macro is called only once, at the beginning of compilation.
6891
6892 This macro need not be defined if the standard form of output
6893 for DBX debugging information is appropriate.
6894
6895 It may be necessary to refer to a label equal to the beginning of the
6896 text section. You can use @samp{assemble_name (stream, ltext_label_name)}
6897 to do so. If you do this, you must also set the variable
6898 @var{used_ltext_label_name} to @code{true}.
6899 @end defmac
6900
6901 @defmac NO_DBX_MAIN_SOURCE_DIRECTORY
6902 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6903 of the current directory for compilation and current source language at
6904 the beginning of the file.
6905 @end defmac
6906
6907 @defmac NO_DBX_GCC_MARKER
6908 Define this macro, with value 1, if GCC should not emit an indication
6909 that this object file was compiled by GCC@. The default is to emit
6910 an @code{N_OPT} stab at the beginning of every source file, with
6911 @samp{gcc2_compiled.} for the string and value 0.
6912 @end defmac
6913
6914 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END (@var{stream}, @var{name})
6915 A C statement to output DBX debugging information at the end of
6916 compilation of the main source file @var{name}. Output should be
6917 written to the stdio stream @var{stream}.
6918
6919 If you don't define this macro, nothing special is output at the end
6920 of compilation, which is correct for most machines.
6921 @end defmac
6922
6923 @defmac DBX_OUTPUT_NULL_N_SO_AT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END
6924 Define this macro @emph{instead of} defining
6925 @code{DBX_OUTPUT_MAIN_SOURCE_FILE_END}, if what needs to be output at
6926 the end of compilation is an @code{N_SO} stab with an empty string,
6927 whose value is the highest absolute text address in the file.
6928 @end defmac
6929
6930 @need 2000
6931 @node SDB and DWARF
6932 @subsection Macros for SDB and DWARF Output
6933
6934 @c prevent bad page break with this line
6935 Here are macros for SDB and DWARF output.
6936
6937 @defmac SDB_DEBUGGING_INFO
6938 Define this macro if GCC should produce COFF-style debugging output
6939 for SDB in response to the @option{-g} option.
6940 @end defmac
6941
6942 @defmac DWARF2_DEBUGGING_INFO
6943 Define this macro if GCC should produce dwarf version 2 format
6944 debugging output in response to the @option{-g} option.
6945
6946 @hook TARGET_DWARF_CALLING_CONVENTION
6947
6948 To support optional call frame debugging information, you must also
6949 define @code{INCOMING_RETURN_ADDR_RTX} and either set
6950 @code{RTX_FRAME_RELATED_P} on the prologue insns if you use RTL for the
6951 prologue, or call @code{dwarf2out_def_cfa} and @code{dwarf2out_reg_save}
6952 as appropriate from @code{TARGET_ASM_FUNCTION_PROLOGUE} if you don't.
6953 @end defmac
6954
6955 @defmac DWARF2_FRAME_INFO
6956 Define this macro to a nonzero value if GCC should always output
6957 Dwarf 2 frame information. If @code{TARGET_EXCEPT_UNWIND_INFO}
6958 (@pxref{Exception Region Output}) returns @code{UI_DWARF2}, and
6959 exceptions are enabled, GCC will output this information not matter
6960 how you define @code{DWARF2_FRAME_INFO}.
6961 @end defmac
6962
6963 @hook TARGET_DEBUG_UNWIND_INFO
6964
6965 @defmac DWARF2_ASM_LINE_DEBUG_INFO
6966 Define this macro to be a nonzero value if the assembler can generate Dwarf 2
6967 line debug info sections. This will result in much more compact line number
6968 tables, and hence is desirable if it works.
6969 @end defmac
6970
6971 @hook TARGET_WANT_DEBUG_PUB_SECTIONS
6972
6973 @hook TARGET_FORCE_AT_COMP_DIR
6974
6975 @hook TARGET_DELAY_SCHED2
6976
6977 @hook TARGET_DELAY_VARTRACK
6978
6979 @hook TARGET_NO_REGISTER_ALLOCATION
6980
6981 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6982 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6983 @var{lab1} minus @var{lab2}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
6984 @end defmac
6985
6986 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_VMS_DELTA (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label1}, @var{label2})
6987 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a difference
6988 between the two given labels in system defined units, e.g. instruction
6989 slots on IA64 VMS, using an integer of the given size.
6990 @end defmac
6991
6992 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_OFFSET (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label}, @var{section})
6993 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a
6994 section-relative reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the
6995 given @var{size}. The label is known to be defined in the given @var{section}.
6996 @end defmac
6997
6998 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_PCREL (@var{stream}, @var{size}, @var{label})
6999 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a self-relative
7000 reference to the given @var{label}, using an integer of the given @var{size}.
7001 @end defmac
7002
7003 @defmac ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_TABLE_REF (@var{label})
7004 A C statement to issue assembly directives that create a reference to
7005 the DWARF table identifier @var{label} from the current section. This
7006 is used on some systems to avoid garbage collecting a DWARF table which
7007 is referenced by a function.
7008 @end defmac
7009
7010 @hook TARGET_ASM_OUTPUT_DWARF_DTPREL
7011
7012 @defmac PUT_SDB_@dots{}
7013 Define these macros to override the assembler syntax for the special
7014 SDB assembler directives. See @file{sdbout.c} for a list of these
7015 macros and their arguments. If the standard syntax is used, you need
7016 not define them yourself.
7017 @end defmac
7018
7019 @defmac SDB_DELIM
7020 Some assemblers do not support a semicolon as a delimiter, even between
7021 SDB assembler directives. In that case, define this macro to be the
7022 delimiter to use (usually @samp{\n}). It is not necessary to define
7023 a new set of @code{PUT_SDB_@var{op}} macros if this is the only change
7024 required.
7025 @end defmac
7026
7027 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_UNKNOWN_REFERENCES
7028 Define this macro to allow references to unknown structure,
7029 union, or enumeration tags to be emitted. Standard COFF does not
7030 allow handling of unknown references, MIPS ECOFF has support for
7031 it.
7032 @end defmac
7033
7034 @defmac SDB_ALLOW_FORWARD_REFERENCES
7035 Define this macro to allow references to structure, union, or
7036 enumeration tags that have not yet been seen to be handled. Some
7037 assemblers choke if forward tags are used, while some require it.
7038 @end defmac
7039
7040 @defmac SDB_OUTPUT_SOURCE_LINE (@var{stream}, @var{line})
7041 A C statement to output SDB debugging information before code for line
7042 number @var{line} of the current source file to the stdio stream
7043 @var{stream}. The default is to emit an @code{.ln} directive.
7044 @end defmac
7045
7046 @need 2000
7047 @node VMS Debug
7048 @subsection Macros for VMS Debug Format
7049
7050 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7051 Here are macros for VMS debug format.
7052
7053 @defmac VMS_DEBUGGING_INFO
7054 Define this macro if GCC should produce debugging output for VMS
7055 in response to the @option{-g} option. The default behavior for VMS
7056 is to generate minimal debug info for a traceback in the absence of
7057 @option{-g} unless explicitly overridden with @option{-g0}. This
7058 behavior is controlled by @code{TARGET_OPTION_OPTIMIZATION} and
7059 @code{TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE}.
7060 @end defmac
7061
7062 @node Floating Point
7063 @section Cross Compilation and Floating Point
7064 @cindex cross compilation and floating point
7065 @cindex floating point and cross compilation
7066
7067 While all modern machines use twos-complement representation for integers,
7068 there are a variety of representations for floating point numbers. This
7069 means that in a cross-compiler the representation of floating point numbers
7070 in the compiled program may be different from that used in the machine
7071 doing the compilation.
7072
7073 Because different representation systems may offer different amounts of
7074 range and precision, all floating point constants must be represented in
7075 the target machine's format. Therefore, the cross compiler cannot
7076 safely use the host machine's floating point arithmetic; it must emulate
7077 the target's arithmetic. To ensure consistency, GCC always uses
7078 emulation to work with floating point values, even when the host and
7079 target floating point formats are identical.
7080
7081 The following macros are provided by @file{real.h} for the compiler to
7082 use. All parts of the compiler which generate or optimize
7083 floating-point calculations must use these macros. They may evaluate
7084 their operands more than once, so operands must not have side effects.
7085
7086 @defmac REAL_VALUE_TYPE
7087 The C data type to be used to hold a floating point value in the target
7088 machine's format. Typically this is a @code{struct} containing an
7089 array of @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}, but all code should treat it as an opaque
7090 quantity.
7091 @end defmac
7092
7093 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7094 Compares for equality the two values, @var{x} and @var{y}. If the target
7095 floating point format supports negative zeroes and/or NaNs,
7096 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (-0.0, 0.0)} is true, and
7097 @samp{REAL_VALUES_EQUAL (NaN, NaN)} is false.
7098 @end deftypefn
7099
7100 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUES_LESS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7101 Tests whether @var{x} is less than @var{y}.
7102 @end deftypefn
7103
7104 @deftypefn Macro HOST_WIDE_INT REAL_VALUE_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7105 Truncates @var{x} to a signed integer, rounding toward zero.
7106 @end deftypefn
7107
7108 @deftypefn Macro {unsigned HOST_WIDE_INT} REAL_VALUE_UNSIGNED_FIX (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7109 Truncates @var{x} to an unsigned integer, rounding toward zero. If
7110 @var{x} is negative, returns zero.
7111 @end deftypefn
7112
7113 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ATOF (const char *@var{string}, machine_mode @var{mode})
7114 Converts @var{string} into a floating point number in the target machine's
7115 representation for mode @var{mode}. This routine can handle both
7116 decimal and hexadecimal floating point constants, using the syntax
7117 defined by the C language for both.
7118 @end deftypefn
7119
7120 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_NEGATIVE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7121 Returns 1 if @var{x} is negative (including negative zero), 0 otherwise.
7122 @end deftypefn
7123
7124 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISINF (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7125 Determines whether @var{x} represents infinity (positive or negative).
7126 @end deftypefn
7127
7128 @deftypefn Macro int REAL_VALUE_ISNAN (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7129 Determines whether @var{x} represents a ``NaN'' (not-a-number).
7130 @end deftypefn
7131
7132 @deftypefn Macro void REAL_ARITHMETIC (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{output}, enum tree_code @var{code}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x}, REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{y})
7133 Calculates an arithmetic operation on the two floating point values
7134 @var{x} and @var{y}, storing the result in @var{output} (which must be a
7135 variable).
7136
7137 The operation to be performed is specified by @var{code}. Only the
7138 following codes are supported: @code{PLUS_EXPR}, @code{MINUS_EXPR},
7139 @code{MULT_EXPR}, @code{RDIV_EXPR}, @code{MAX_EXPR}, @code{MIN_EXPR}.
7140
7141 If @code{REAL_ARITHMETIC} is asked to evaluate division by zero and the
7142 target's floating point format cannot represent infinity, it will call
7143 @code{abort}. Callers should check for this situation first, using
7144 @code{MODE_HAS_INFINITIES}. @xref{Storage Layout}.
7145 @end deftypefn
7146
7147 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_NEGATE (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7148 Returns the negative of the floating point value @var{x}.
7149 @end deftypefn
7150
7151 @deftypefn Macro REAL_VALUE_TYPE REAL_VALUE_ABS (REAL_VALUE_TYPE @var{x})
7152 Returns the absolute value of @var{x}.
7153 @end deftypefn
7154
7155 @node Mode Switching
7156 @section Mode Switching Instructions
7157 @cindex mode switching
7158 The following macros control mode switching optimizations:
7159
7160 @defmac OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING (@var{entity})
7161 Define this macro if the port needs extra instructions inserted for mode
7162 switching in an optimizing compilation.
7163
7164 For an example, the SH4 can perform both single and double precision
7165 floating point operations, but to perform a single precision operation,
7166 the FPSCR PR bit has to be cleared, while for a double precision
7167 operation, this bit has to be set. Changing the PR bit requires a general
7168 purpose register as a scratch register, hence these FPSCR sets have to
7169 be inserted before reload, i.e.@: you can't put this into instruction emitting
7170 or @code{TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG}.
7171
7172 You can have multiple entities that are mode-switched, and select at run time
7173 which entities actually need it. @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING} should
7174 return nonzero for any @var{entity} that needs mode-switching.
7175 If you define this macro, you also have to define
7176 @code{NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING}, @code{TARGET_MODE_NEEDED},
7177 @code{TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY} and @code{TARGET_MODE_EMIT}.
7178 @code{TARGET_MODE_AFTER}, @code{TARGET_MODE_ENTRY}, and @code{TARGET_MODE_EXIT}
7179 are optional.
7180 @end defmac
7181
7182 @defmac NUM_MODES_FOR_MODE_SWITCHING
7183 If you define @code{OPTIMIZE_MODE_SWITCHING}, you have to define this as
7184 initializer for an array of integers. Each initializer element
7185 N refers to an entity that needs mode switching, and specifies the number
7186 of different modes that might need to be set for this entity.
7187 The position of the initializer in the initializer---starting counting at
7188 zero---determines the integer that is used to refer to the mode-switched
7189 entity in question.
7190 In macros that take mode arguments / yield a mode result, modes are
7191 represented as numbers 0 @dots{} N @minus{} 1. N is used to specify that no mode
7192 switch is needed / supplied.
7193 @end defmac
7194
7195 @hook TARGET_MODE_EMIT
7196
7197 @hook TARGET_MODE_NEEDED
7198
7199 @hook TARGET_MODE_AFTER
7200
7201 @hook TARGET_MODE_ENTRY
7202
7203 @hook TARGET_MODE_EXIT
7204
7205 @hook TARGET_MODE_PRIORITY
7206
7207 @node Target Attributes
7208 @section Defining target-specific uses of @code{__attribute__}
7209 @cindex target attributes
7210 @cindex machine attributes
7211 @cindex attributes, target-specific
7212
7213 Target-specific attributes may be defined for functions, data and types.
7214 These are described using the following target hooks; they also need to
7215 be documented in @file{extend.texi}.
7216
7217 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TABLE
7218
7219 @hook TARGET_ATTRIBUTE_TAKES_IDENTIFIER_P
7220
7221 @hook TARGET_COMP_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7222
7223 @hook TARGET_SET_DEFAULT_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7224
7225 @hook TARGET_MERGE_TYPE_ATTRIBUTES
7226
7227 @hook TARGET_MERGE_DECL_ATTRIBUTES
7228
7229 @hook TARGET_VALID_DLLIMPORT_ATTRIBUTE_P
7230
7231 @defmac TARGET_DECLSPEC
7232 Define this macro to a nonzero value if you want to treat
7233 @code{__declspec(X)} as equivalent to @code{__attribute((X))}. By
7234 default, this behavior is enabled only for targets that define
7235 @code{TARGET_DLLIMPORT_DECL_ATTRIBUTES}. The current implementation
7236 of @code{__declspec} is via a built-in macro, but you should not rely
7237 on this implementation detail.
7238 @end defmac
7239
7240 @hook TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES
7241
7242 @hook TARGET_FUNCTION_ATTRIBUTE_INLINABLE_P
7243
7244 @hook TARGET_OPTION_VALID_ATTRIBUTE_P
7245
7246 @hook TARGET_OPTION_SAVE
7247
7248 @hook TARGET_OPTION_RESTORE
7249
7250 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRINT
7251
7252 @hook TARGET_OPTION_PRAGMA_PARSE
7253
7254 @hook TARGET_OPTION_OVERRIDE
7255
7256 @hook TARGET_OPTION_FUNCTION_VERSIONS
7257
7258 @hook TARGET_CAN_INLINE_P
7259
7260 @node Emulated TLS
7261 @section Emulating TLS
7262 @cindex Emulated TLS
7263
7264 For targets whose psABI does not provide Thread Local Storage via
7265 specific relocations and instruction sequences, an emulation layer is
7266 used. A set of target hooks allows this emulation layer to be
7267 configured for the requirements of a particular target. For instance
7268 the psABI may in fact specify TLS support in terms of an emulation
7269 layer.
7270
7271 The emulation layer works by creating a control object for every TLS
7272 object. To access the TLS object, a lookup function is provided
7273 which, when given the address of the control object, will return the
7274 address of the current thread's instance of the TLS object.
7275
7276 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_GET_ADDRESS
7277
7278 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_REGISTER_COMMON
7279
7280 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_SECTION
7281
7282 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_SECTION
7283
7284 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_PREFIX
7285
7286 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_TMPL_PREFIX
7287
7288 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_FIELDS
7289
7290 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_INIT
7291
7292 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_VAR_ALIGN_FIXED
7293
7294 @hook TARGET_EMUTLS_DEBUG_FORM_TLS_ADDRESS
7295
7296 @node MIPS Coprocessors
7297 @section Defining coprocessor specifics for MIPS targets.
7298 @cindex MIPS coprocessor-definition macros
7299
7300 The MIPS specification allows MIPS implementations to have as many as 4
7301 coprocessors, each with as many as 32 private registers. GCC supports
7302 accessing these registers and transferring values between the registers
7303 and memory using asm-ized variables. For example:
7304
7305 @smallexample
7306 register unsigned int cp0count asm ("c0r1");
7307 unsigned int d;
7308
7309 d = cp0count + 3;
7310 @end smallexample
7311
7312 (``c0r1'' is the default name of register 1 in coprocessor 0; alternate
7313 names may be added as described below, or the default names may be
7314 overridden entirely in @code{SUBTARGET_CONDITIONAL_REGISTER_USAGE}.)
7315
7316 Coprocessor registers are assumed to be epilogue-used; sets to them will
7317 be preserved even if it does not appear that the register is used again
7318 later in the function.
7319
7320 Another note: according to the MIPS spec, coprocessor 1 (if present) is
7321 the FPU@. One accesses COP1 registers through standard mips
7322 floating-point support; they are not included in this mechanism.
7323
7324 @node PCH Target
7325 @section Parameters for Precompiled Header Validity Checking
7326 @cindex parameters, precompiled headers
7327
7328 @hook TARGET_GET_PCH_VALIDITY
7329
7330 @hook TARGET_PCH_VALID_P
7331
7332 @hook TARGET_CHECK_PCH_TARGET_FLAGS
7333
7334 @hook TARGET_PREPARE_PCH_SAVE
7335
7336 @node C++ ABI
7337 @section C++ ABI parameters
7338 @cindex parameters, c++ abi
7339
7340 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_TYPE
7341
7342 @hook TARGET_CXX_GUARD_MASK_BIT
7343
7344 @hook TARGET_CXX_GET_COOKIE_SIZE
7345
7346 @hook TARGET_CXX_COOKIE_HAS_SIZE
7347
7348 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPORT_EXPORT_CLASS
7349
7350 @hook TARGET_CXX_CDTOR_RETURNS_THIS
7351
7352 @hook TARGET_CXX_KEY_METHOD_MAY_BE_INLINE
7353
7354 @hook TARGET_CXX_DETERMINE_CLASS_DATA_VISIBILITY
7355
7356 @hook TARGET_CXX_CLASS_DATA_ALWAYS_COMDAT
7357
7358 @hook TARGET_CXX_LIBRARY_RTTI_COMDAT
7359
7360 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_AEABI_ATEXIT
7361
7362 @hook TARGET_CXX_USE_ATEXIT_FOR_CXA_ATEXIT
7363
7364 @hook TARGET_CXX_ADJUST_CLASS_AT_DEFINITION
7365
7366 @hook TARGET_CXX_DECL_MANGLING_CONTEXT
7367
7368 @node Named Address Spaces
7369 @section Adding support for named address spaces
7370 @cindex named address spaces
7371
7372 The draft technical report of the ISO/IEC JTC1 S22 WG14 N1275
7373 standards committee, @cite{Programming Languages - C - Extensions to
7374 support embedded processors}, specifies a syntax for embedded
7375 processors to specify alternate address spaces. You can configure a
7376 GCC port to support section 5.1 of the draft report to add support for
7377 address spaces other than the default address space. These address
7378 spaces are new keywords that are similar to the @code{volatile} and
7379 @code{const} type attributes.
7380
7381 Pointers to named address spaces can have a different size than
7382 pointers to the generic address space.
7383
7384 For example, the SPU port uses the @code{__ea} address space to refer
7385 to memory in the host processor, rather than memory local to the SPU
7386 processor. Access to memory in the @code{__ea} address space involves
7387 issuing DMA operations to move data between the host processor and the
7388 local processor memory address space. Pointers in the @code{__ea}
7389 address space are either 32 bits or 64 bits based on the
7390 @option{-mea32} or @option{-mea64} switches (native SPU pointers are
7391 always 32 bits).
7392
7393 Internally, address spaces are represented as a small integer in the
7394 range 0 to 15 with address space 0 being reserved for the generic
7395 address space.
7396
7397 To register a named address space qualifier keyword with the C front end,
7398 the target may call the @code{c_register_addr_space} routine. For example,
7399 the SPU port uses the following to declare @code{__ea} as the keyword for
7400 named address space #1:
7401 @smallexample
7402 #define ADDR_SPACE_EA 1
7403 c_register_addr_space ("__ea", ADDR_SPACE_EA);
7404 @end smallexample
7405
7406 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_POINTER_MODE
7407
7408 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_ADDRESS_MODE
7409
7410 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_VALID_POINTER_MODE
7411
7412 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMATE_ADDRESS_P
7413
7414 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_LEGITIMIZE_ADDRESS
7415
7416 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_SUBSET_P
7417
7418 @hook TARGET_ADDR_SPACE_CONVERT
7419
7420 @node Misc
7421 @section Miscellaneous Parameters
7422 @cindex parameters, miscellaneous
7423
7424 @c prevent bad page break with this line
7425 Here are several miscellaneous parameters.
7426
7427 @defmac HAS_LONG_COND_BRANCH
7428 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7429 has conditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7430 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7431 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7432 set to false, gcc will convert any conditional branches that attempt
7433 to cross between sections into unconditional branches or indirect jumps.
7434 @end defmac
7435
7436 @defmac HAS_LONG_UNCOND_BRANCH
7437 Define this boolean macro to indicate whether or not your architecture
7438 has unconditional branches that can span all of memory. It is used in
7439 conjunction with an optimization that partitions hot and cold basic
7440 blocks into separate sections of the executable. If this macro is
7441 set to false, gcc will convert any unconditional branches that attempt
7442 to cross between sections into indirect jumps.
7443 @end defmac
7444
7445 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_MODE
7446 An alias for a machine mode name. This is the machine mode that
7447 elements of a jump-table should have.
7448 @end defmac
7449
7450 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_SHORTEN_MODE (@var{min_offset}, @var{max_offset}, @var{body})
7451 Optional: return the preferred mode for an @code{addr_diff_vec}
7452 when the minimum and maximum offset are known. If you define this,
7453 it enables extra code in branch shortening to deal with @code{addr_diff_vec}.
7454 To make this work, you also have to define @code{INSN_ALIGN} and
7455 make the alignment for @code{addr_diff_vec} explicit.
7456 The @var{body} argument is provided so that the offset_unsigned and scale
7457 flags can be updated.
7458 @end defmac
7459
7460 @defmac CASE_VECTOR_PC_RELATIVE
7461 Define this macro to be a C expression to indicate when jump-tables
7462 should contain relative addresses. You need not define this macro if
7463 jump-tables never contain relative addresses, or jump-tables should
7464 contain relative addresses only when @option{-fPIC} or @option{-fPIC}
7465 is in effect.
7466 @end defmac
7467
7468 @hook TARGET_CASE_VALUES_THRESHOLD
7469
7470 @defmac WORD_REGISTER_OPERATIONS
7471 Define this macro if operations between registers with integral mode
7472 smaller than a word are always performed on the entire register.
7473 Most RISC machines have this property and most CISC machines do not.
7474 @end defmac
7475
7476 @defmac LOAD_EXTEND_OP (@var{mem_mode})
7477 Define this macro to be a C expression indicating when insns that read
7478 memory in @var{mem_mode}, an integral mode narrower than a word, set the
7479 bits outside of @var{mem_mode} to be either the sign-extension or the
7480 zero-extension of the data read. Return @code{SIGN_EXTEND} for values
7481 of @var{mem_mode} for which the
7482 insn sign-extends, @code{ZERO_EXTEND} for which it zero-extends, and
7483 @code{UNKNOWN} for other modes.
7484
7485 This macro is not called with @var{mem_mode} non-integral or with a width
7486 greater than or equal to @code{BITS_PER_WORD}, so you may return any
7487 value in this case. Do not define this macro if it would always return
7488 @code{UNKNOWN}. On machines where this macro is defined, you will normally
7489 define it as the constant @code{SIGN_EXTEND} or @code{ZERO_EXTEND}.
7490
7491 You may return a non-@code{UNKNOWN} value even if for some hard registers
7492 the sign extension is not performed, if for the @code{REGNO_REG_CLASS}
7493 of these hard registers @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} returns nonzero
7494 when the @var{from} mode is @var{mem_mode} and the @var{to} mode is any
7495 integral mode larger than this but not larger than @code{word_mode}.
7496
7497 You must return @code{UNKNOWN} if for some hard registers that allow this
7498 mode, @code{CANNOT_CHANGE_MODE_CLASS} says that they cannot change to
7499 @code{word_mode}, but that they can change to another integral mode that
7500 is larger then @var{mem_mode} but still smaller than @code{word_mode}.
7501 @end defmac
7502
7503 @defmac SHORT_IMMEDIATES_SIGN_EXTEND
7504 Define this macro if loading short immediate values into registers sign
7505 extends.
7506 @end defmac
7507
7508 @hook TARGET_MIN_DIVISIONS_FOR_RECIP_MUL
7509
7510 @defmac MOVE_MAX
7511 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7512 between memory and registers or between two memory locations.
7513 @end defmac
7514
7515 @defmac MAX_MOVE_MAX
7516 The maximum number of bytes that a single instruction can move quickly
7517 between memory and registers or between two memory locations. If this
7518 is undefined, the default is @code{MOVE_MAX}. Otherwise, it is the
7519 constant value that is the largest value that @code{MOVE_MAX} can have
7520 at run-time.
7521 @end defmac
7522
7523 @defmac SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED
7524 A C expression that is nonzero if on this machine the number of bits
7525 actually used for the count of a shift operation is equal to the number
7526 of bits needed to represent the size of the object being shifted. When
7527 this macro is nonzero, the compiler will assume that it is safe to omit
7528 a sign-extend, zero-extend, and certain bitwise `and' instructions that
7529 truncates the count of a shift operation. On machines that have
7530 instructions that act on bit-fields at variable positions, which may
7531 include `bit test' instructions, a nonzero @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED}
7532 also enables deletion of truncations of the values that serve as
7533 arguments to bit-field instructions.
7534
7535 If both types of instructions truncate the count (for shifts) and
7536 position (for bit-field operations), or if no variable-position bit-field
7537 instructions exist, you should define this macro.
7538
7539 However, on some machines, such as the 80386 and the 680x0, truncation
7540 only applies to shift operations and not the (real or pretended)
7541 bit-field operations. Define @code{SHIFT_COUNT_TRUNCATED} to be zero on
7542 such machines. Instead, add patterns to the @file{md} file that include
7543 the implied truncation of the shift instructions.
7544
7545 You need not define this macro if it would always have the value of zero.
7546 @end defmac
7547
7548 @anchor{TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK}
7549 @hook TARGET_SHIFT_TRUNCATION_MASK
7550
7551 @defmac TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION (@var{outprec}, @var{inprec})
7552 A C expression which is nonzero if on this machine it is safe to
7553 ``convert'' an integer of @var{inprec} bits to one of @var{outprec}
7554 bits (where @var{outprec} is smaller than @var{inprec}) by merely
7555 operating on it as if it had only @var{outprec} bits.
7556
7557 On many machines, this expression can be 1.
7558
7559 @c rearranged this, removed the phrase "it is reported that". this was
7560 @c to fix an overfull hbox. --mew 10feb93
7561 When @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} returns 1 for a pair of sizes for
7562 modes for which @code{MODES_TIEABLE_P} is 0, suboptimal code can result.
7563 If this is the case, making @code{TRULY_NOOP_TRUNCATION} return 0 in
7564 such cases may improve things.
7565 @end defmac
7566
7567 @hook TARGET_MODE_REP_EXTENDED
7568
7569 @defmac STORE_FLAG_VALUE
7570 A C expression describing the value returned by a comparison operator
7571 with an integral mode and stored by a store-flag instruction
7572 (@samp{cstore@var{mode}4}) when the condition is true. This description must
7573 apply to @emph{all} the @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} patterns and all the
7574 comparison operators whose results have a @code{MODE_INT} mode.
7575
7576 A value of 1 or @minus{}1 means that the instruction implementing the
7577 comparison operator returns exactly 1 or @minus{}1 when the comparison is true
7578 and 0 when the comparison is false. Otherwise, the value indicates
7579 which bits of the result are guaranteed to be 1 when the comparison is
7580 true. This value is interpreted in the mode of the comparison
7581 operation, which is given by the mode of the first operand in the
7582 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} pattern. Either the low bit or the sign bit of
7583 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} be on. Presently, only those bits are used by
7584 the compiler.
7585
7586 If @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is neither 1 or @minus{}1, the compiler will
7587 generate code that depends only on the specified bits. It can also
7588 replace comparison operators with equivalent operations if they cause
7589 the required bits to be set, even if the remaining bits are undefined.
7590 For example, on a machine whose comparison operators return an
7591 @code{SImode} value and where @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} is defined as
7592 @samp{0x80000000}, saying that just the sign bit is relevant, the
7593 expression
7594
7595 @smallexample
7596 (ne:SI (and:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{power-of-2})) (const_int 0))
7597 @end smallexample
7598
7599 @noindent
7600 can be converted to
7601
7602 @smallexample
7603 (ashift:SI @var{x} (const_int @var{n}))
7604 @end smallexample
7605
7606 @noindent
7607 where @var{n} is the appropriate shift count to move the bit being
7608 tested into the sign bit.
7609
7610 There is no way to describe a machine that always sets the low-order bit
7611 for a true value, but does not guarantee the value of any other bits,
7612 but we do not know of any machine that has such an instruction. If you
7613 are trying to port GCC to such a machine, include an instruction to
7614 perform a logical-and of the result with 1 in the pattern for the
7615 comparison operators and let us know at @email{gcc@@gcc.gnu.org}.
7616
7617 Often, a machine will have multiple instructions that obtain a value
7618 from a comparison (or the condition codes). Here are rules to guide the
7619 choice of value for @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}, and hence the instructions
7620 to be used:
7621
7622 @itemize @bullet
7623 @item
7624 Use the shortest sequence that yields a valid definition for
7625 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE}. It is more efficient for the compiler to
7626 ``normalize'' the value (convert it to, e.g., 1 or 0) than for the
7627 comparison operators to do so because there may be opportunities to
7628 combine the normalization with other operations.
7629
7630 @item
7631 For equal-length sequences, use a value of 1 or @minus{}1, with @minus{}1 being
7632 slightly preferred on machines with expensive jumps and 1 preferred on
7633 other machines.
7634
7635 @item
7636 As a second choice, choose a value of @samp{0x80000001} if instructions
7637 exist that set both the sign and low-order bits but do not define the
7638 others.
7639
7640 @item
7641 Otherwise, use a value of @samp{0x80000000}.
7642 @end itemize
7643
7644 Many machines can produce both the value chosen for
7645 @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} and its negation in the same number of
7646 instructions. On those machines, you should also define a pattern for
7647 those cases, e.g., one matching
7648
7649 @smallexample
7650 (set @var{A} (neg:@var{m} (ne:@var{m} @var{B} @var{C})))
7651 @end smallexample
7652
7653 Some machines can also perform @code{and} or @code{plus} operations on
7654 condition code values with less instructions than the corresponding
7655 @samp{cstore@var{mode}4} insn followed by @code{and} or @code{plus}. On those
7656 machines, define the appropriate patterns. Use the names @code{incscc}
7657 and @code{decscc}, respectively, for the patterns which perform
7658 @code{plus} or @code{minus} operations on condition code values. See
7659 @file{rs6000.md} for some examples. The GNU Superoptimizer can be used to
7660 find such instruction sequences on other machines.
7661
7662 If this macro is not defined, the default value, 1, is used. You need
7663 not define @code{STORE_FLAG_VALUE} if the machine has no store-flag
7664 instructions, or if the value generated by these instructions is 1.
7665 @end defmac
7666
7667 @defmac FLOAT_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7668 A C expression that gives a nonzero @code{REAL_VALUE_TYPE} value that is
7669 returned when comparison operators with floating-point results are true.
7670 Define this macro on machines that have comparison operations that return
7671 floating-point values. If there are no such operations, do not define
7672 this macro.
7673 @end defmac
7674
7675 @defmac VECTOR_STORE_FLAG_VALUE (@var{mode})
7676 A C expression that gives a rtx representing the nonzero true element
7677 for vector comparisons. The returned rtx should be valid for the inner
7678 mode of @var{mode} which is guaranteed to be a vector mode. Define
7679 this macro on machines that have vector comparison operations that
7680 return a vector result. If there are no such operations, do not define
7681 this macro. Typically, this macro is defined as @code{const1_rtx} or
7682 @code{constm1_rtx}. This macro may return @code{NULL_RTX} to prevent
7683 the compiler optimizing such vector comparison operations for the
7684 given mode.
7685 @end defmac
7686
7687 @defmac CLZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7688 @defmacx CTZ_DEFINED_VALUE_AT_ZERO (@var{mode}, @var{value})
7689 A C expression that indicates whether the architecture defines a value
7690 for @code{clz} or @code{ctz} with a zero operand.
7691 A result of @code{0} indicates the value is undefined.
7692 If the value is defined for only the RTL expression, the macro should
7693 evaluate to @code{1}; if the value applies also to the corresponding optab
7694 entry (which is normally the case if it expands directly into
7695 the corresponding RTL), then the macro should evaluate to @code{2}.
7696 In the cases where the value is defined, @var{value} should be set to
7697 this value.
7698
7699 If this macro is not defined, the value of @code{clz} or
7700 @code{ctz} at zero is assumed to be undefined.
7701
7702 This macro must be defined if the target's expansion for @code{ffs}
7703 relies on a particular value to get correct results. Otherwise it
7704 is not necessary, though it may be used to optimize some corner cases, and
7705 to provide a default expansion for the @code{ffs} optab.
7706
7707 Note that regardless of this macro the ``definedness'' of @code{clz}
7708 and @code{ctz} at zero do @emph{not} extend to the builtin functions
7709 visible to the user. Thus one may be free to adjust the value at will
7710 to match the target expansion of these operations without fear of
7711 breaking the API@.
7712 @end defmac
7713
7714 @defmac Pmode
7715 An alias for the machine mode for pointers. On most machines, define
7716 this to be the integer mode corresponding to the width of a hardware
7717 pointer; @code{SImode} on 32-bit machine or @code{DImode} on 64-bit machines.
7718 On some machines you must define this to be one of the partial integer
7719 modes, such as @code{PSImode}.
7720
7721 The width of @code{Pmode} must be at least as large as the value of
7722 @code{POINTER_SIZE}. If it is not equal, you must define the macro
7723 @code{POINTERS_EXTEND_UNSIGNED} to specify how pointers are extended
7724 to @code{Pmode}.
7725 @end defmac
7726
7727 @defmac FUNCTION_MODE
7728 An alias for the machine mode used for memory references to functions
7729 being called, in @code{call} RTL expressions. On most CISC machines,
7730 where an instruction can begin at any byte address, this should be
7731 @code{QImode}. On most RISC machines, where all instructions have fixed
7732 size and alignment, this should be a mode with the same size and alignment
7733 as the machine instruction words - typically @code{SImode} or @code{HImode}.
7734 @end defmac
7735
7736 @defmac STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS
7737 In normal operation, the preprocessor expands @code{__STDC__} to the
7738 constant 1, to signify that GCC conforms to ISO Standard C@. On some
7739 hosts, like Solaris, the system compiler uses a different convention,
7740 where @code{__STDC__} is normally 0, but is 1 if the user specifies
7741 strict conformance to the C Standard.
7742
7743 Defining @code{STDC_0_IN_SYSTEM_HEADERS} makes GNU CPP follows the host
7744 convention when processing system header files, but when processing user
7745 files @code{__STDC__} will always expand to 1.
7746 @end defmac
7747
7748 @hook TARGET_C_PREINCLUDE
7749
7750 @hook TARGET_CXX_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7751
7752 @defmac NO_IMPLICIT_EXTERN_C
7753 Define this macro if the system header files support C++ as well as C@.
7754 This macro inhibits the usual method of using system header files in
7755 C++, which is to pretend that the file's contents are enclosed in
7756 @samp{extern "C" @{@dots{}@}}.
7757 @end defmac
7758
7759 @findex #pragma
7760 @findex pragma
7761 @defmac REGISTER_TARGET_PRAGMAS ()
7762 Define this macro if you want to implement any target-specific pragmas.
7763 If defined, it is a C expression which makes a series of calls to
7764 @code{c_register_pragma} or @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion}
7765 for each pragma. The macro may also do any
7766 setup required for the pragmas.
7767
7768 The primary reason to define this macro is to provide compatibility with
7769 other compilers for the same target. In general, we discourage
7770 definition of target-specific pragmas for GCC@.
7771
7772 If the pragma can be implemented by attributes then you should consider
7773 defining the target hook @samp{TARGET_INSERT_ATTRIBUTES} as well.
7774
7775 Preprocessor macros that appear on pragma lines are not expanded. All
7776 @samp{#pragma} directives that do not match any registered pragma are
7777 silently ignored, unless the user specifies @option{-Wunknown-pragmas}.
7778 @end defmac
7779
7780 @deftypefun void c_register_pragma (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7781 @deftypefunx void c_register_pragma_with_expansion (const char *@var{space}, const char *@var{name}, void (*@var{callback}) (struct cpp_reader *))
7782
7783 Each call to @code{c_register_pragma} or
7784 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} establishes one pragma. The
7785 @var{callback} routine will be called when the preprocessor encounters a
7786 pragma of the form
7787
7788 @smallexample
7789 #pragma [@var{space}] @var{name} @dots{}
7790 @end smallexample
7791
7792 @var{space} is the case-sensitive namespace of the pragma, or
7793 @code{NULL} to put the pragma in the global namespace. The callback
7794 routine receives @var{pfile} as its first argument, which can be passed
7795 on to cpplib's functions if necessary. You can lex tokens after the
7796 @var{name} by calling @code{pragma_lex}. Tokens that are not read by the
7797 callback will be silently ignored. The end of the line is indicated by
7798 a token of type @code{CPP_EOF}. Macro expansion occurs on the
7799 arguments of pragmas registered with
7800 @code{c_register_pragma_with_expansion} but not on the arguments of
7801 pragmas registered with @code{c_register_pragma}.
7802
7803 Note that the use of @code{pragma_lex} is specific to the C and C++
7804 compilers. It will not work in the Java or Fortran compilers, or any
7805 other language compilers for that matter. Thus if @code{pragma_lex} is going
7806 to be called from target-specific code, it must only be done so when
7807 building the C and C++ compilers. This can be done by defining the
7808 variables @code{c_target_objs} and @code{cxx_target_objs} in the
7809 target entry in the @file{config.gcc} file. These variables should name
7810 the target-specific, language-specific object file which contains the
7811 code that uses @code{pragma_lex}. Note it will also be necessary to add a
7812 rule to the makefile fragment pointed to by @code{tmake_file} that shows
7813 how to build this object file.
7814 @end deftypefun
7815
7816 @defmac HANDLE_PRAGMA_PACK_WITH_EXPANSION
7817 Define this macro if macros should be expanded in the
7818 arguments of @samp{#pragma pack}.
7819 @end defmac
7820
7821 @defmac TARGET_DEFAULT_PACK_STRUCT
7822 If your target requires a structure packing default other than 0 (meaning
7823 the machine default), define this macro to the necessary value (in bytes).
7824 This must be a value that would also be valid to use with
7825 @samp{#pragma pack()} (that is, a small power of two).
7826 @end defmac
7827
7828 @defmac DOLLARS_IN_IDENTIFIERS
7829 Define this macro to control use of the character @samp{$} in
7830 identifier names for the C family of languages. 0 means @samp{$} is
7831 not allowed by default; 1 means it is allowed. 1 is the default;
7832 there is no need to define this macro in that case.
7833 @end defmac
7834
7835 @defmac INSN_SETS_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7836 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7837 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7838 even if they appear to use a resource set or clobbered in @var{insn}.
7839 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}; GCC knows that
7840 every @code{call_insn} has this behavior. On machines where some @code{insn}
7841 or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and hence has this behavior,
7842 you should define this macro.
7843
7844 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7845 @end defmac
7846
7847 @defmac INSN_REFERENCES_ARE_DELAYED (@var{insn})
7848 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if it is safe for the
7849 delay slot scheduler to place instructions in the delay slot of @var{insn},
7850 even if they appear to set or clobber a resource referenced in @var{insn}.
7851 @var{insn} is always a @code{jump_insn} or an @code{insn}. On machines where
7852 some @code{insn} or @code{jump_insn} is really a function call and its operands
7853 are registers whose use is actually in the subroutine it calls, you should
7854 define this macro. Doing so allows the delay slot scheduler to move
7855 instructions which copy arguments into the argument registers into the delay
7856 slot of @var{insn}.
7857
7858 You need not define this macro if it would always return zero.
7859 @end defmac
7860
7861 @defmac MULTIPLE_SYMBOL_SPACES
7862 Define this macro as a C expression that is nonzero if, in some cases,
7863 global symbols from one translation unit may not be bound to undefined
7864 symbols in another translation unit without user intervention. For
7865 instance, under Microsoft Windows symbols must be explicitly imported
7866 from shared libraries (DLLs).
7867
7868 You need not define this macro if it would always evaluate to zero.
7869 @end defmac
7870
7871 @hook TARGET_MD_ASM_CLOBBERS
7872
7873 @defmac MATH_LIBRARY
7874 Define this macro as a C string constant for the linker argument to link
7875 in the system math library, minus the initial @samp{"-l"}, or
7876 @samp{""} if the target does not have a
7877 separate math library.
7878
7879 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"m"} is wrong.
7880 @end defmac
7881
7882 @defmac LIBRARY_PATH_ENV
7883 Define this macro as a C string constant for the environment variable that
7884 specifies where the linker should look for libraries.
7885
7886 You need only define this macro if the default of @samp{"LIBRARY_PATH"}
7887 is wrong.
7888 @end defmac
7889
7890 @defmac TARGET_POSIX_IO
7891 Define this macro if the target supports the following POSIX@ file
7892 functions, access, mkdir and file locking with fcntl / F_SETLKW@.
7893 Defining @code{TARGET_POSIX_IO} will enable the test coverage code
7894 to use file locking when exiting a program, which avoids race conditions
7895 if the program has forked. It will also create directories at run-time
7896 for cross-profiling.
7897 @end defmac
7898
7899 @defmac MAX_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTE
7900
7901 A C expression for the maximum number of instructions to execute via
7902 conditional execution instructions instead of a branch. A value of
7903 @code{BRANCH_COST}+1 is the default if the machine does not use cc0, and
7904 1 if it does use cc0.
7905 @end defmac
7906
7907 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7908 Used if the target needs to perform machine-dependent modifications on the
7909 conditionals used for turning basic blocks into conditionally executed code.
7910 @var{ce_info} points to a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which
7911 contains information about the currently processed blocks. @var{true_expr}
7912 and @var{false_expr} are the tests that are used for converting the
7913 then-block and the else-block, respectively. Set either @var{true_expr} or
7914 @var{false_expr} to a null pointer if the tests cannot be converted.
7915 @end defmac
7916
7917 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_MULTIPLE_TESTS (@var{ce_info}, @var{bb}, @var{true_expr}, @var{false_expr})
7918 Like @code{IFCVT_MODIFY_TESTS}, but used when converting more complicated
7919 if-statements into conditions combined by @code{and} and @code{or} operations.
7920 @var{bb} contains the basic block that contains the test that is currently
7921 being processed and about to be turned into a condition.
7922 @end defmac
7923
7924 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_INSN (@var{ce_info}, @var{pattern}, @var{insn})
7925 A C expression to modify the @var{PATTERN} of an @var{INSN} that is to
7926 be converted to conditional execution format. @var{ce_info} points to
7927 a data structure, @code{struct ce_if_block}, which contains information
7928 about the currently processed blocks.
7929 @end defmac
7930
7931 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_FINAL (@var{ce_info})
7932 A C expression to perform any final machine dependent modifications in
7933 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7934 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7935 to by @var{ce_info}.
7936 @end defmac
7937
7938 @defmac IFCVT_MODIFY_CANCEL (@var{ce_info})
7939 A C expression to cancel any machine dependent modifications in
7940 converting code to conditional execution. The involved basic blocks
7941 can be found in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7942 to by @var{ce_info}.
7943 @end defmac
7944
7945 @defmac IFCVT_MACHDEP_INIT (@var{ce_info})
7946 A C expression to initialize any machine specific data for if-conversion
7947 of the if-block in the @code{struct ce_if_block} structure that is pointed
7948 to by @var{ce_info}.
7949 @end defmac
7950
7951 @hook TARGET_MACHINE_DEPENDENT_REORG
7952
7953 @hook TARGET_INIT_BUILTINS
7954
7955 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_DECL
7956
7957 @hook TARGET_EXPAND_BUILTIN
7958
7959 @hook TARGET_BUILTIN_CHKP_FUNCTION
7960 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_TYPE
7961 @hook TARGET_CHKP_BOUND_MODE
7962 @hook TARGET_CHKP_MAKE_BOUNDS_CONSTANT
7963 @hook TARGET_CHKP_INITIALIZE_BOUNDS
7964
7965 @hook TARGET_RESOLVE_OVERLOADED_BUILTIN
7966
7967 @hook TARGET_FOLD_BUILTIN
7968
7969 @hook TARGET_GIMPLE_FOLD_BUILTIN
7970
7971 @hook TARGET_COMPARE_VERSION_PRIORITY
7972
7973 @hook TARGET_GET_FUNCTION_VERSIONS_DISPATCHER
7974
7975 @hook TARGET_GENERATE_VERSION_DISPATCHER_BODY
7976
7977 @hook TARGET_CAN_USE_DOLOOP_P
7978
7979 @hook TARGET_INVALID_WITHIN_DOLOOP
7980
7981 @hook TARGET_LEGITIMATE_COMBINED_INSN
7982
7983 @defmac MD_CAN_REDIRECT_BRANCH (@var{branch1}, @var{branch2})
7984
7985 Take a branch insn in @var{branch1} and another in @var{branch2}.
7986 Return true if redirecting @var{branch1} to the destination of
7987 @var{branch2} is possible.
7988
7989 On some targets, branches may have a limited range. Optimizing the
7990 filling of delay slots can result in branches being redirected, and this
7991 may in turn cause a branch offset to overflow.
7992 @end defmac
7993
7994 @hook TARGET_CAN_FOLLOW_JUMP
7995
7996 @hook TARGET_COMMUTATIVE_P
7997
7998 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_INITIAL_VALUE
7999
8000 @hook TARGET_UNSPEC_MAY_TRAP_P
8001
8002 @hook TARGET_SET_CURRENT_FUNCTION
8003
8004 @defmac TARGET_OBJECT_SUFFIX
8005 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix for object
8006 files on your target machine. If you do not define this macro, GCC will
8007 use @samp{.o} as the suffix for object files.
8008 @end defmac
8009
8010 @defmac TARGET_EXECUTABLE_SUFFIX
8011 Define this macro to be a C string representing the suffix to be
8012 automatically added to executable files on your target machine. If you
8013 do not define this macro, GCC will use the null string as the suffix for
8014 executable files.
8015 @end defmac
8016
8017 @defmac COLLECT_EXPORT_LIST
8018 If defined, @code{collect2} will scan the individual object files
8019 specified on its command line and create an export list for the linker.
8020 Define this macro for systems like AIX, where the linker discards
8021 object files that are not referenced from @code{main} and uses export
8022 lists.
8023 @end defmac
8024
8025 @defmac MODIFY_JNI_METHOD_CALL (@var{mdecl})
8026 Define this macro to a C expression representing a variant of the
8027 method call @var{mdecl}, if Java Native Interface (JNI) methods
8028 must be invoked differently from other methods on your target.
8029 For example, on 32-bit Microsoft Windows, JNI methods must be invoked using
8030 the @code{stdcall} calling convention and this macro is then
8031 defined as this expression:
8032
8033 @smallexample
8034 build_type_attribute_variant (@var{mdecl},
8035 build_tree_list
8036 (get_identifier ("stdcall"),
8037 NULL))
8038 @end smallexample
8039 @end defmac
8040
8041 @hook TARGET_CANNOT_MODIFY_JUMPS_P
8042
8043 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CLASS
8044
8045 @hook TARGET_BRANCH_TARGET_REGISTER_CALLEE_SAVED
8046
8047 @hook TARGET_HAVE_CONDITIONAL_EXECUTION
8048
8049 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_FIRST
8050
8051 @hook TARGET_GEN_CCMP_NEXT
8052
8053 @hook TARGET_LOOP_UNROLL_ADJUST
8054
8055 @defmac POWI_MAX_MULTS
8056 If defined, this macro is interpreted as a signed integer C expression
8057 that specifies the maximum number of floating point multiplications
8058 that should be emitted when expanding exponentiation by an integer
8059 constant inline. When this value is defined, exponentiation requiring
8060 more than this number of multiplications is implemented by calling the
8061 system library's @code{pow}, @code{powf} or @code{powl} routines.
8062 The default value places no upper bound on the multiplication count.
8063 @end defmac
8064
8065 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8066 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8067 target. The parameter @var{stdinc} indicates if normal include files
8068 are present. The parameter @var{sysroot} is the system root directory.
8069 The parameter @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8070 @end deftypefn
8071
8072 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_EXTRA_PRE_INCLUDES (const char *@var{sysroot}, const char *@var{iprefix}, int @var{stdinc})
8073 This target hook should register any extra include files for the
8074 target before any standard headers. The parameter @var{stdinc}
8075 indicates if normal include files are present. The parameter
8076 @var{sysroot} is the system root directory. The parameter
8077 @var{iprefix} is the prefix for the gcc directory.
8078 @end deftypefn
8079
8080 @deftypefn Macro void TARGET_OPTF (char *@var{path})
8081 This target hook should register special include paths for the target.
8082 The parameter @var{path} is the include to register. On Darwin
8083 systems, this is used for Framework includes, which have semantics
8084 that are different from @option{-I}.
8085 @end deftypefn
8086
8087 @defmac bool TARGET_USE_LOCAL_THUNK_ALIAS_P (tree @var{fndecl})
8088 This target macro returns @code{true} if it is safe to use a local alias
8089 for a virtual function @var{fndecl} when constructing thunks,
8090 @code{false} otherwise. By default, the macro returns @code{true} for all
8091 functions, if a target supports aliases (i.e.@: defines
8092 @code{ASM_OUTPUT_DEF}), @code{false} otherwise,
8093 @end defmac
8094
8095 @defmac TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES
8096 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8097 target-specific format checking information for the @option{-Wformat}
8098 option. The default is to have no target-specific format checks.
8099 @end defmac
8100
8101 @defmac TARGET_N_FORMAT_TYPES
8102 If defined, this macro is the number of entries in
8103 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES}.
8104 @end defmac
8105
8106 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES
8107 If defined, this macro is the name of a global variable containing
8108 target-specific format overrides for the @option{-Wformat} option. The
8109 default is to have no target-specific format overrides. If defined,
8110 @code{TARGET_FORMAT_TYPES} must be defined, too.
8111 @end defmac
8112
8113 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES_COUNT
8114 If defined, this macro specifies the number of entries in
8115 @code{TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_ATTRIBUTES}.
8116 @end defmac
8117
8118 @defmac TARGET_OVERRIDES_FORMAT_INIT
8119 If defined, this macro specifies the optional initialization
8120 routine for target specific customizations of the system printf
8121 and scanf formatter settings.
8122 @end defmac
8123
8124 @hook TARGET_RELAXED_ORDERING
8125
8126 @hook TARGET_INVALID_ARG_FOR_UNPROTOTYPED_FN
8127
8128 @hook TARGET_INVALID_CONVERSION
8129
8130 @hook TARGET_INVALID_UNARY_OP
8131
8132 @hook TARGET_INVALID_BINARY_OP
8133
8134 @hook TARGET_INVALID_PARAMETER_TYPE
8135
8136 @hook TARGET_INVALID_RETURN_TYPE
8137
8138 @hook TARGET_PROMOTED_TYPE
8139
8140 @hook TARGET_CONVERT_TO_TYPE
8141
8142 @defmac TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION
8143 This macro determines whether to use the JCR section to register Java
8144 classes. By default, TARGET_USE_JCR_SECTION is defined to 1 if both
8145 SUPPORTS_WEAK and TARGET_HAVE_NAMED_SECTIONS are true, else 0.
8146 @end defmac
8147
8148 @defmac OBJC_JBLEN
8149 This macro determines the size of the objective C jump buffer for the
8150 NeXT runtime. By default, OBJC_JBLEN is defined to an innocuous value.
8151 @end defmac
8152
8153 @defmac LIBGCC2_UNWIND_ATTRIBUTE
8154 Define this macro if any target-specific attributes need to be attached
8155 to the functions in @file{libgcc} that provide low-level support for
8156 call stack unwinding. It is used in declarations in @file{unwind-generic.h}
8157 and the associated definitions of those functions.
8158 @end defmac
8159
8160 @hook TARGET_UPDATE_STACK_BOUNDARY
8161
8162 @hook TARGET_GET_DRAP_RTX
8163
8164 @hook TARGET_ALLOCATE_STACK_SLOTS_FOR_ARGS
8165
8166 @hook TARGET_CONST_ANCHOR
8167
8168 @hook TARGET_ASAN_SHADOW_OFFSET
8169
8170 @hook TARGET_MEMMODEL_CHECK
8171
8172 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_TEST_AND_SET_TRUEVAL
8173
8174 @hook TARGET_HAS_IFUNC_P
8175
8176 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ALIGN_FOR_MODE
8177
8178 @hook TARGET_ATOMIC_ASSIGN_EXPAND_FENV
8179
8180 @hook TARGET_RECORD_OFFLOAD_SYMBOL
8181
8182 @hook TARGET_OFFLOAD_OPTIONS
8183
8184 @defmac TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT
8185
8186 On older ports, large integers are stored in @code{CONST_DOUBLE} rtl
8187 objects. Newer ports define @code{TARGET_SUPPORTS_WIDE_INT} to be nonzero
8188 to indicate that large integers are stored in
8189 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} rtl objects. The @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} allows
8190 very large integer constants to be represented. @code{CONST_DOUBLE}
8191 is limited to twice the size of the host's @code{HOST_WIDE_INT}
8192 representation.
8193
8194 Converting a port mostly requires looking for the places where
8195 @code{CONST_DOUBLE}s are used with @code{VOIDmode} and replacing that
8196 code with code that accesses @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. @samp{"grep -i
8197 const_double"} at the port level gets you to 95% of the changes that
8198 need to be made. There are a few places that require a deeper look.
8199
8200 @itemize @bullet
8201 @item
8202 There is no equivalent to @code{hval} and @code{lval} for
8203 @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}s. This would be difficult to express in the md
8204 language since there are a variable number of elements.
8205
8206 Most ports only check that @code{hval} is either 0 or -1 to see if the
8207 value is small. As mentioned above, this will no longer be necessary
8208 since small constants are always @code{CONST_INT}. Of course there
8209 are still a few exceptions, the alpha's constraint used by the zap
8210 instruction certainly requires careful examination by C code.
8211 However, all the current code does is pass the hval and lval to C
8212 code, so evolving the c code to look at the @code{CONST_WIDE_INT} is
8213 not really a large change.
8214
8215 @item
8216 Because there is no standard template that ports use to materialize
8217 constants, there is likely to be some futzing that is unique to each
8218 port in this code.
8219
8220 @item
8221 The rtx costs may have to be adjusted to properly account for larger
8222 constants that are represented as @code{CONST_WIDE_INT}.
8223 @end itemize
8224
8225 All and all it does not take long to convert ports that the
8226 maintainer is familiar with.
8227
8228 @end defmac